Gla200 FL 2018 X156

GLA
Operator's Manual
GLA Operator's Manual
É1565843001ÃËÍ
1565843001
Order no. P156 0057 13 Part no. 156 584 30 01 Edition A2018
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols Publication details
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- Internet
lowing symbols:
G WARNING Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
Warning notes make you aware of dangers following websites:
which could pose a threat to your health or
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
life, or to the health and life of others.
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor- Editorial office
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal. ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan- out written permission from Daimler AG.
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i Practical tips or further information that Vehicle manufacturer
could be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instruction Daimler AG
that must be followed. Mercedesstraße 137
X Several of these symbols in succession 70327 Stuttgart
indicate an instruction with several Germany
steps.
(Y This symbol tells you where you can
page) find more information about a topic.
Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the
play multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
As at 20.10.2016
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz media system from your authorized
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Center.
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- Digital form via the Internet
cle before driving. For your own safety and a The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and vides easy access to all information
warning notices in this Operator's Manual. regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
Ignoring them could result in damage to the tem. It also provides helpful animations,
vehicle or personal injury to you or others. interesting background information and a
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow wide array of search options.
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Digital form as an App
Benz Limited Warranty. Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
The equipment or product designation of your can view all the information on your vehicle
vehicle may vary depending on: and multimedia system via mobile Internet
RModel or download it independently of network
access. Available for smartphones or tab-
ROrder
lets.
RCountry specification
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
RAvailability
App:
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle: Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
RPrinted Operator's Manual may not yet be available in your country.
RMaintenance Booklet Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
REquipment-dependent supplements Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all A Daimler Company
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
1565843001 É1565843001ÃËÍ
2 Contents
Steering wheel ..................................... 100

Index ....................................................... 4 Mirrors ................................................. 101
Memory function ................................. 103
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 24
Introduction ........................................... 24 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 105
Operation ............................................... 24 Exterior lighting ................................... 105
Interior lighting .................................... 108
Introduction ......................................... 25 Replacing bulbs ................................... 109
Protecting the environment ................... 25 Windshield wipers ................................ 112
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 25
Operator's Manual ................................. 26 Climate control ................................. 116
Service and vehicle operation ................ 26 Overview of climate control systems ... 116
Operating safety .................................... 27 Operating the climate control sys-
QR codes for the rescue card ................ 28 tems .................................................... 121
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 28 Air vents .............................................. 126
Information on copyright ....................... 29
Driving and parking .......................... 127
At a glance ........................................... 31 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 127
Cockpit .................................................. 31 Driving ................................................. 127
Instrument cluster ................................. 32 DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 33 except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ......... 134
Center console ...................................... 34 DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Door control panel ................................. 37 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................... 135
Overhead control panel ......................... 38 Automatic transmission ....................... 136
Refueling ............................................. 144
Safety ................................................... 39 Parking ................................................ 147
Panic alarm ............................................ 39 Driving tips .......................................... 150
Occupant safety .................................... 39 Driving systems ................................... 158
Children in the vehicle ........................... 53
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 59 On-board computer and displays .... 189
Driving safety systems ........................... 59 Important safety notes ........................ 189
Protection against theft ......................... 67 Displays and operation ........................ 189
Menus and submenus ......................... 192
Opening and closing ........................... 69 Display messages ................................ 204
SmartKey ............................................... 69 Warning and indicator lamps in the
Doors ..................................................... 75 instrument cluster ............................... 231
Cargo compartment ............................... 77
Trunk ..................................................... 83 Multimedia system ........................... 243
Side windows ......................................... 86 General notes ...................................... 243
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Important safety notes ........................ 243
panel ...................................................... 90 Function restrictions ............................ 243
Operating system ................................ 244
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95
Correct driver's seat position ................ 95 Stowage and features ...................... 251
Seats ..................................................... 95 Loading guidelines ............................... 251
Contents 3
Stowage areas ..................................... 251

Features .............................................. 257
Maintenance and care ...................... 273

Engine compartment ........................... 273
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 277
Care ..................................................... 278
Breakdown assistance ..................... 285

Where will I find...? .............................. 285
Flat tire ................................................ 287
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 291
Jump-starting ....................................... 294
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 297
Fuses ................................................... 300
Wheels and tires ............................... 302

Important safety notes ........................ 302
Operation ............................................ 302
Winter operation .................................. 304
Tire pressure ....................................... 305
Loading the vehicle .............................. 313
All about wheels and tires ................... 316
Changing a wheel ................................ 322
Wheel and tire combinations ............... 326
Technical data ................................... 328

Information regarding technical data ... 328
Vehicle electronics .............................. 328
Identification plates ............................. 329
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 330
Vehicle data ......................................... 335
Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 336
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Occupant Classification System

(OCS) ............................................... 46
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- lamps ............................................... 40
tion System) Side impact air bag .......................... 46
4MATIC Window curtain air bag .................... 46
Display message ............................ 228 Air vents
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Important safety notes .................. 126
drive) .................................................. 169 Rear ............................................... 126
360° camera Setting the center air vents ........... 126
Function/notes ............................. 182 Setting the side air vents ............... 126
Air-conditioning system
A see Climate control
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Alarm
Display message ............................ 205 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67
Function/notes ................................ 60 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 67
Important safety notes .................... 60 Switching the function on/off
Warning lamp ................................. 234 (ATA) ................................................ 67
Acceleration Alarm system
see Kickdown see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Accident AMG
Automatic measures after an acci- Adaptive sport suspension sys-
dent ................................................. 53 tem ................................................ 169
Activating media mode Performance Seat ............................ 99
General notes ................................ 249 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Activating/deactivating cooling system
with air dehumidification ................. 121 General Information ....................... 169
Active Brake Assist AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 201
Activating or deactivating .............. 198 AMG Performance exhaust sys-
Display message ............................ 210 tem ..................................................... 133
Function/notes ................................ 61 Anti-lock braking system
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Additional speedometer ................... 200 Anti-skid chains
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 333 see Snow chains
Address book Anti-Theft Alarm system
see also Digital Operator's Man- see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
ual .................................................. 243 Approach/departure angle .............. 157
Adjusting the volume Ashtray ............................................... 259
Multimedia system ........................ 244 Assistance display (on-board com-
Air bags puter) .................................................. 198
Deployment ..................................... 51 Assistance menu (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 213 puter) .................................................. 197
Front air bag (driver, front ASSYST PLUS
passenger) ....................................... 45 Displaying a service message ........ 277
Important safety notes .................... 44 Driving abroad ............................... 278
Introduction ..................................... 44 Hiding a service message .............. 277
Knee bag .......................................... 45 Information about Service ............. 277
Index 5
Resetting the service interval dis- Engaging park position automati-

play ................................................ 277 cally ............................................... 137
Service message ............................ 277 Engaging reverse gear ................... 137
Special service requirements ......... 277 Engaging the park position ............ 136
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Holding the vehicle stationary on
Activating/deactivating ................... 67 uphill gradients .............................. 140
Function ........................................... 67 Kickdown ....................................... 140
Switching off the alarm .................... 67 Manual shifting .............................. 142
ATTENTION ASSIST Oil temperature (on-board com-
Activating/deactivating ................. 199 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 201
Display message ............................ 220 Overview ........................................ 136
Function/notes ............................. 184 Problem (malfunction) ................... 144
Audio 20 Pulling away ................................... 131
Driving dynamics display ............... 172 Selector lever ................................ 138
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 195 Starting the engine ........................ 130
Audio system Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 142
see separate operating instructions Transmission position display ........ 138
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Transmission position display
see Qualified specialist workshop (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 136
Authorized workshop Transmission positions .................. 139
see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic transmission emer-
AUTO lights gency mode ....................................... 144
Display message ............................ 217
see Lights B
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 278
Back button ....................................... 244
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Backup lamp
stop function) .................................... 132
Display message ............................ 216
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Bag hook ............................................ 256
start/stop function) .......................... 132
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 60
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 105
Basic settings
Automatic transmission
see Settings
Accelerator pedal position ............. 139
Battery (SmartKey)
Changing gear ............................... 139
Checking .......................................... 72
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 136
Important safety notes .................... 72
Drive program ................................ 140
Replacing ......................................... 72
Drive program display .................... 136
Battery (vehicle)
Driving tips .................................... 139
Charging ........................................ 293
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
Display message ............................ 219
cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
Important safety notes .................. 291
cles) ............................................... 134
Jump starting ................................. 294
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Belt
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 135
see Seat belts
Emergency running mode .............. 144
Belt warning ......................................... 43
Engaging drive position .................. 138
Blind Spot Assist
Engaging neutral ............................ 137
Activating/deactivating (on-
Engaging park position
board computer) ............................ 199
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 138
Display message ............................ 221
6 Index
Notes/function .............................. 185 C

Blower
see Climate control Calling up a malfunction
Bluetooth® see Display messages
Car
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 247
see Vehicle
Searching for a mobile phone
Care
(device manager) ........................... 248
Car wash ........................................ 278
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Carpets .......................................... 284
ual .................................................. 243
Display ........................................... 282
Telephony ...................................... 247
Brake Assist Exhaust pipe .................................. 282
Exterior lights ................................ 281
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake assistance Gear or selector lever .................... 283
Interior ........................................... 282
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid Matte finish ................................... 280
Notes ............................................. 278
Display message ............................ 210
Paint .............................................. 279
Notes ............................................. 333
Brake force distribution Plastic trim .................................... 282
Power washer ................................ 279
see EBD (electronic brake force
Rear view camera .......................... 281
distribution)
Brake lamp Roof lining ...................................... 284
Seat belt ........................................ 283
Replacing bulbs ............................. 111
Brake lamps Seat cover ..................................... 283
Sensors ......................................... 281
Display message ............................ 215
Brakes Steering wheel ............................... 283
Trim pieces .................................... 283
ABS .................................................. 60
Washing by hand ........................... 279
BAS .................................................. 60
Wheels ........................................... 280
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 333
Windows ........................................ 280
Braking assistance appropriate to
Wiper blades .................................. 281
the situation ..................................... 62
Wooden trim .................................. 283
Display message ............................ 205
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 254
EBD .................................................. 66
Cargo compartment floor
Hill start assist ............................... 131
HOLD function ............................... 166 Important safety notes .................. 256
Important safety notes .................. 152 Opening/closing ............................ 257
Maintenance .................................. 153 Stowage well (under) ..................... 256
Parking brake ................................ 148 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 256
Riding tips ...................................... 152 CD
Warning lamp ................................. 233 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Braking assistance appropriate to ual .................................................. 243
the situation CD player (on-board computer) ........ 196
Function/notes ................................ 62 Center console
Breakdown Lower section .................................. 35
Where will I find...? ........................ 285 Upper section .................................. 34
see Flat tire Central locking
see Tow-starting Automatic locking (on-board com-
see Towing away puter) ............................................. 200
Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 190 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 69
Index 7
Change of address .............................. 26 Setting the temperature ................ 122

Change of ownership .......................... 26 Switching air-recirculation mode
Changing a wheel on/off ............................................ 125
Wheels and tires ............................ 323 Switching on/off ........................... 121
Child Switching residual heat on/off ...... 125
Restraint system .............................. 55 Switching the rear window
Child seat defroster on/off ............................ 124
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 58 Switching the ZONE function
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat on/off ............................................ 123
anchors ............................................ 56 Cockpit
On the front-passenger seat ............ 57 Overview .......................................... 31
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 57 Collision warning
Top Tether ....................................... 56 see Active Brake Assist
Child-proof locks COMAND
Important safety notes .................... 58 Driving dynamics display ............... 172
Rear doors ....................................... 59 COMAND display
Children Cleaning ......................................... 282
Special seat belt retractor ............... 54 Combination switch .......................... 107
Children in the vehicle Compass
Important safety notes .................... 53 Calibrating ..................................... 271
Cigarette lighter ................................ 260 Calling up ....................................... 270
Cleaning Magnetic field zone maps .............. 271
Mirror turn signal ........................... 281 Setting ........................................... 271
Climate control Connecting a USB device
Air-conditioning system ................. 117 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Automatic climate control (dual- ual .................................................. 243
zone) .............................................. 119 Consumption statistics (on-board
Controlling automatically ............... 122 computer) .......................................... 193
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 121 Controller ........................................... 244
Defrosting the windows ................. 124 Convenience closing feature .............. 88
Defrosting the windshield .............. 123 Convenience opening feature ............ 87
General notes ................................ 116 Coolant (engine)
Indicator lamp ................................ 122 Checking the level ......................... 276
Information about using auto- Display message ............................ 218
matic climate control ..................... 120 Filling capacity ............................... 334
Maximum cooling .......................... 124 Important safety notes .................. 333
Notes on using the air-condition- Temperature (on-board computer,
ing system ..................................... 118 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201
Overview of systems ...................... 116 Temperature gauge ........................ 190
Problem with the rear window Warning lamp ................................. 239
defroster ........................................ 125 Cooling
Problems with cooling with air see Climate control
dehumidification ............................ 122 Copyright ............................................. 29
Refrigerant ..................................... 334 Cornering light function
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 335 Display message ............................ 215
Setting the air distribution ............. 122 Function/notes ............................. 107
Setting the air vents ...................... 126
Setting the airflow ......................... 123
8 Index
Cover Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 204

see Roller sunblind Lights ............................................. 215
Cruise control Safety systems .............................. 205
Activation conditions ..................... 159 SmartKey ....................................... 230
Cruise control lever ....................... 159 Tires ............................................... 224
Deactivating ................................... 160 Vehicle ........................................... 226
Display message ............................ 223 Distance control
Driving system ............................... 158 see Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Function/notes ............................. 158 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Important safety notes .................. 158 Activating ....................................... 162
Setting a speed .............................. 159 Calling up a speed ......................... 162
Storing and maintaining current Cruise control lever ....................... 162
speed ............................................. 159 Display Message ............................ 222
Cup holder Displays in the instrument cluster .. 165
Center console .............................. 258 Driving tips .................................... 166
Important safety notes .................. 257 Function/notes ............................. 160
Rear compartment ......................... 259 Important safety notes .................. 161
Customer Assistance Center Setting a speed .............................. 163
(CAC) ..................................................... 27 Setting the specified minimum
Customer Relations Department ....... 27 distance ......................................... 164
Stopping ........................................ 163
D Storing a speed .............................. 162
Switching off .................................. 164
Dashboard Distance recorder ............................. 193
see Cockpit Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 241
Dashboard lighting
Distance warning function
see Instrument cluster lighting
Function/notes ................................ 61
Data
Warning lamp ................................. 241
see Technical data Doors
Daytime running lamps
Automatic locking (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 217
puter) ............................................. 200
Function/notes ............................. 105
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 76
Switching on/off (on-board com-
Central locking/unlocking
puter) ............................................. 200
(SmartKey) ....................................... 69
Declarations of conformity ................. 27
Control panel ................................... 37
Diagnostics connection ...................... 27 Display message ............................ 229
Digital Operator's Manual Emergency locking ........................... 77
Help ................................................. 24 Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
Introduction ..................................... 24 Important safety notes .................... 75
Digital speedometer ......................... 194 Opening (from inside) ...................... 75
DIRECT SELECT lever Drinking and driving ......................... 150
Automatic transmission ................. 136 Drive program
Display messages Automatic transmission ................. 140
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 277 Display ........................................... 138
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 204 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 136
Driving systems ............................. 220 Driver's door
Engine ............................................ 218 see Doors
General notes ................................ 204
Index 9
Driver's seat Driving tips

see Seat Automatic transmission ................. 139
Driving abroad Brakes ........................................... 152
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 278 Break-in period .............................. 127
Driving dynamics display Checking brake lining thickness .... 153
Off-road program ........................... 172 Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 166
Driving in mountainous terrain Downhill gradient ........................... 152
Approach/departure angle ............ 157 Drinking and driving ....................... 150
Driving off-road Driving in winter ............................. 154
see Off-road driving Driving on flooded roads ................ 154
Driving on flooded roads .................. 154 Driving on sand .............................. 157
Driving safety system Driving on wet roads ...................... 154
Active Brake Assist .......................... 61 Exhaust check ............................... 150
Braking assistance appropriate to Fuel ................................................ 150
the situation ..................................... 62 General .......................................... 150
Driving safety systems Hydroplaning ................................. 154
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 60 Icy road surfaces ........................... 154
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 67 Limited braking efficiency on sal-
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 60 ted roads ....................................... 153
Distance warning function ............... 61 Off-road driving .............................. 155
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Snow chains .................................. 305
bution) ............................................. 66 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 127
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Tire ruts ......................................... 157
gram) ............................................... 63 Traveling uphill ............................... 157
Important safety information ........... 59 Wet road surface ........................... 152
Overview .......................................... 59 DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
STEER CONTROL ............................. 67 Display message ............................ 220
Driving system Function/notes ............................. 170
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 160 DVD video
Off-road program ........................... 171 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 196
Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 172 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Parking Pilot .................................. 175 ual .................................................. 243
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG DYNAMIC SELECT button
vehicles) ........................................ 168 Climate control (3-zone automatic
Start-off assist ............................... 167 climate control) ............................. 121
Driving systems Climate control (air-conditioning
360°camera .................................. 182 system) .......................................... 118
AMG adaptive sport suspension DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
system ........................................... 169 cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 184 cles) .................................................... 134
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 185 DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Cruise control ................................ 158 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................. 135
Display message ............................ 220
HOLD function ............................... 166 E
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 187
EASY-PACK tailgate
Lane Tracking package .................. 185
see Tailgate
Rear view camera .......................... 179
10 Index
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Checking the oil level using the
bution) dipstick .......................................... 274
Display message ............................ 207 Display message ............................ 219
Function/notes ................................ 66 Filling capacity ............................... 333
ECO display Notes about oil grades ................... 332
Function/notes ............................. 151 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 274
On-board computer ....................... 193 Temperature (on-board computer,
ECO start/stop function Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201
Automatic engine start .................. 132 Engine oil additives
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 132 see Additives (engine oil)
Deactivating/activating ................. 133 Entering an address
General information ....................... 132 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Important safety notes .................. 132 ual .................................................. 243
Introduction ................................... 131 ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Emergency gram)
Automatic measures after an acci- Activating/deactivating (on-
dent ................................................. 53 board computer) ............................ 233
Emergency braking AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 202
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Characteristics ................................. 64
Emergency release Deactivating/activating (button
Driver's door .................................... 76 in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 65
Vehicle ............................................. 76 Deactivating/activating (except
Emergency Tensioning Devices Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 64
Activation ......................................... 51 Deactivating/activating (on-
Engine board computer, except
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 238 Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 198
Display message ............................ 218 Display message ............................ 205
ECO start/stop function ................ 131 Function/notes ................................ 63
Engine number ............................... 330 General notes .................................. 63
Irregular running ............................ 133 Important safety information ........... 63
Jump-starting ................................. 294 Trailer stabilization ........................... 66
Starting (important safety notes) ... 129 Warning lamp ................................. 235
Starting problems .......................... 133 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
Starting the engine with the tem) ...................................................... 63
SmartKey ....................................... 130 Exhaust
Starting via smartphone ................ 130 see Exhaust pipe
Starting with the Start/Stop but- Exhaust check ................................... 150
ton ................................................. 130 Exhaust pipe
Switching off .................................. 147 Cleaning ......................................... 282
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 300 Exterior lighting
Engine electronics Cleaning ......................................... 281
Problem (malfunction) ................... 133 see Lights
Engine oil Exterior mirrors
Adding ........................................... 275 Adjusting ....................................... 101
Additives ........................................ 333 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102
Checking the oil level ..................... 274
Index 11
Folding in when locking (on-board Fuel filler flap

computer) ...................................... 201 Opening ......................................... 145
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 102 Fuel level
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101 Calling up the range (on-board
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 102 computer) ...................................... 193
Setting ........................................... 102 Fuel tank
Storing settings (memory func- Capacity ........................................ 331
tion) ............................................... 104 Problem (malfunction) ................... 146
Storing the parking position .......... 103 Fuses
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 252 Allocation chart ............................. 301
Before changing ............................. 300
F Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 300
Favorites
Fuse box in the front-passenger
Overview ........................................ 245 footwell .......................................... 301
Filler cap
see Refueling
First-aid kit ......................................... 286
G
Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 288 Garage door opener
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 287 Clearing the memory ..................... 270
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 288 General notes ................................ 267
Floormats ........................................... 271 Important safety notes .................. 268
Fog lamps Opening/closing the garage door .. 270
Switching on/off ........................... 106 Problems when programming ........ 269
Frequencies Programming (button in the rear-
Mobile phone ................................. 328 view mirror) ................................... 268
Two-way radio ................................ 328 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 269
Front fog lamps Gasoline ............................................. 331
Display message ............................ 216 Gear indicator (on-board com-
Switching on/off ........................... 106 puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201
Front-passenger seat Genuine parts ...................................... 25
Folding the backrest forward/ Glove box ........................................... 252
back ............................................... 253 Google™ Local Search
Fuel see also Digital Operator's Man-
Additives ........................................ 332 ual .................................................. 243
Consumption statistics .................. 193
Displaying the current consump- H
tion ................................................ 193
Handbrake
Displaying the range ...................... 193
Driving tips .................................... 150 see Parking brake
Handling control system
E10 ................................................ 331
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 331 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................... 80, 84
Important safety notes .................. 331 Hazard warning lamps
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146 Display message ............................ 229
Refueling ........................................ 144 Switching on/off ........................... 107
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 331
12 Index
Head restraints Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Adjusting ......................................... 97 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 189
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98 Interior lighting
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98 Control ........................................... 108
Headlamps Overview ........................................ 108
Fogging up ..................................... 108 Reading lamp ................................. 108
see Automatic headlamp mode iPod®
Heating see also Digital Operator's Man-
see Climate control ual .................................................. 243
High beam flasher ............................. 107
High-beam headlamps J
Display message ............................ 216
Replacing bulbs ............................. 110 Jack
Switching on/off ........................... 107 Storage location ............................ 286
Hill start assist .................................. 131 Using ............................................. 324
HOLD function Jump starting (engine) ...................... 294
Activating ....................................... 167
Activation conditions ..................... 166 K
Deactivating ................................... 167 Key positions
Display message ............................ 220 Start/Stop button .......................... 128
Function/notes ............................. 166 KEYLESS-GO
Home address Convenience closing feature ............ 88
see also Digital Operator's Man- Deactivation ..................................... 70
ual .................................................. 243 Locking ............................................ 70
Hood Unlocking ......................................... 70
Closing ........................................... 274 Kickdown
Display message ............................ 229 Driving tips .................................... 140
Important safety notes .................. 273 Manual gearshifting ....................... 144
Opening ......................................... 273 Knee bag .............................................. 45
Horn ...................................................... 31
Hydroplaning ..................................... 154 L
I Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Ignition key Lane detection (automatic)
see SmartKey see Lane Keeping Assist
Ignition lock Lane Keeping Assist
see Key positions Activating/deactivating (on-
Immobilizer .......................................... 67 board computer) ............................ 199
Indicator lamp Display message ............................ 221
Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 111 Function/information .................... 187
Indicator lamps Lane Tracking package ..................... 185
see Warning and indicator lamps Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 202
Indicators LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
see Turn signals anchors ................................................ 56
Instrument cluster License plate lamp (display mes-
Overview .......................................... 32 sage) ................................................... 216
Settings ......................................... 199 Light sensor (display message) ....... 217
Index 13
Lights mbrace
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 105 Call priority .................................... 264
Cornering light function ................. 107 Display message ............................ 210
Fog lamps ...................................... 106 Downloading destinations
Fogged up headlamps .................... 108 (COMAND) ..................................... 264
Hazard warning lamps ................... 107 Downloading routes ....................... 267
High beam flasher .......................... 107 Emergency call .............................. 261
High-beam headlamps ................... 107 General notes ................................ 260
Light switch ................................... 105 Geo fencing ................................... 267
Low-beam headlamps .................... 106 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266
Parking lamps ................................ 106 MB info call button ........................ 263
Rear fog lamp ................................ 106 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 266
Setting exterior lighting ................. 105 Remote vehicle locking .................. 265
Standing lamps .............................. 106 Roadside assistance button ........... 262
Switching the daytime running Search & Send ............................... 264
lamps on/off (on-board com- Self-test ......................................... 261
puter) ............................................. 200 Speed alert .................................... 267
Turn signals ................................... 107 System .......................................... 261
Loading guidelines ............................ 251 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 267
Locking Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265
see Central locking Mechanical key
Locking (doors) Function/notes ................................ 71
Automatic ........................................ 76 Inserting .......................................... 72
Emergency locking ........................... 77 Locking vehicle ................................ 77
From inside (central locking but- Removing ......................................... 71
ton) .................................................. 75 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 76
Locking centrally Memory card (audio) ......................... 196
see Central locking Memory function ............................... 103
Locking verification signal (on- Message memory (on-board com-
board computer) ............................... 200 puter) .................................................. 204
Low-beam headlamps Messages
Display message ............................ 215 see Display messages
Replacing bulbs ............................. 110 Mirror turn signal
Switching on/off ........................... 106 Cleaning ......................................... 281
Lubricant additives Mirrors
see Additives (engine oil) see Exterior mirrors
Lumbar support see Rear-view mirror
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
port .................................................. 98 Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
M face) .............................................. 247
M+S tires ............................................ 304 Connecting (device manager) ........ 248
Malfunction message Frequencies ................................... 328
Installation ..................................... 328
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc- Menu (on-board computer) ............ 196
Transmission output (maximum) .... 328
tions) .................................................. 280
14 Index
Model type Occupant safety

see Vehicle identification plate Air bags ........................................... 44
Modifying the programming Automatic measures after an acci-
(SmartKey) ........................................... 71 dent ................................................. 53
MOExtended tires .............................. 288 Belt warning ..................................... 43
Mounting wheels Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 326 Important safety notes .................... 39
Mounting a new wheel ................... 325 Introduction to the restraint sys-
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 323 tem .................................................. 39
Raising the vehicle ......................... 324 Occupant Classification System
Removing a wheel .......................... 325 (OCS) ............................................... 46
Securing the vehicle against roll- PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
ing away ........................................ 324 lamps ............................................... 40
MP3 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 59
Operation ....................................... 196 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40
see also Digital Operator's Man- Seat belt .......................................... 40
ual .................................................. 243 OCS
Multifunction display Conditions ....................................... 47
Function/notes ............................. 192 Faults ............................................... 50
Permanent display ......................... 200 Operation ......................................... 47
Multifunction steering wheel System self-test ............................... 49
Operating the on-board computer .. 190 Odometer ........................................... 193
Overview .......................................... 33 Off-road driving
Multimedia system Approach/departure angle ............ 336
Switching on and off ...................... 244 Checklist after driving off-road ...... 157
Music files Checklist before driving off-road .... 156
see also Digital Operator's Man- General information ....................... 156
ual .................................................. 243 Important safety notes .................. 155
Maximum gradient climbing abil-
N ity .................................................. 336
Traveling uphill ............................... 157
Navigation Off-road Program
Entering a destination .................... 245 Driving dynamics display ............... 172
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 194 General notes ................................ 171
see also Digital Operator's Man- Off-road system
ual .................................................. 243 DSR ............................................... 170
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Off road drive program .................. 171
cle ....................................................... 127 Off-road 4ETS .................................. 63
Off-road ABS .................................... 60
O Off-road ESP® .................................. 66
Occupant Classification System On-board computer
(OCS) AMG menu ..................................... 201
Conditions ....................................... 47 Assistance graphic menu ............... 198
Faults ............................................... 50 Assistance menu ........................... 197
Operation ......................................... 47 Audio menu ................................... 195
System self-test ............................... 49 Convenience submenu .................. 201
Display messages .......................... 204
Displaying a service message ........ 277
Index 15
Factory settings ............................. 201 Parking

Important safety notes .................. 189 Important safety notes .................. 147
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 199 Parking brake ................................ 148
Lighting submenu .......................... 200 Parking position for the exterior
Menu overview .............................. 192 mirror on the front-passenger
Message memory .......................... 204 side ................................................ 103
Navigation menu ............................ 194 Rear view camera .......................... 179
Operation ....................................... 190 Parking aid
RACETIMER ................................... 202 see Exterior mirrors
Service menu ................................. 199 see Rear view camera
Settings menu ............................... 199 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Standard display ............................ 193 Deactivating/activating ................. 174
Telephone menu ............................ 196 Driving system ............................... 172
Trip menu ...................................... 193 Function/notes ............................. 172
Vehicle submenu ........................... 200 Important safety notes .................. 172
Video DVD operation ..................... 196 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 175
On-board diagnostic interface Sensor range ................................. 173
see Diagnostics connection Warning display ............................. 173
Opening and closing the side trim Parking assistance
panels ................................................. 111 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Operating safety Parking brake
Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Applying automatically ................... 149
Operating system Applying or releasing manually ...... 148
see On-board computer Display message ............................ 207
Operation Electric parking brake .................... 148
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 24 Emergency braking ........................ 149
Operator's Manual General notes ................................ 148
Vehicle equipment ........................... 26 Releasing automatically ................. 149
Outside temperature display ........... 189 Warning lamp ................................. 238
Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Parking lamps
Override feature Switching on/off ........................... 106
Rear side windows ........................... 59 Parking Pilot
Canceling ....................................... 179
P Detecting parking spaces .............. 176
Display Message ............................ 221
Paint code number ............................ 329 Exiting a parking space .................. 178
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 279 Function/notes ............................. 175
Panic alarm .......................................... 39 Important safety notes .................. 175
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Parking .......................................... 177
sliding panel PASSENGER AIR BAG
Important safety notes .................... 90 Display message ............................ 213
Operating ......................................... 91 Indicator lamps ................................ 40
Operating the roller sunblinds for Problem (malfunction) ................... 213
the sliding sunroof ........................... 92 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 59
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 94 Phone book
Reversing feature ............................. 91 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Parcel shelf ........................................ 256 ual .................................................. 243
16 Index
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Rear lamps

tions) .................................................. 282 see Lights
Power washers .................................. 279 Rear seat
Power windows Adjusting the angle of the backr-
see Side windows ests ................................................ 255
Protection against theft Rear seats
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67 Folding the backrest forwards/
Immobilizer ...................................... 67 back ............................................... 255
Protection of the environment Rear view camera
General notes .................................. 25 "Reverse parking" function ............ 181
Pulling away Cleaning instructions ..................... 281
Automatic transmission ................. 131 Display in the multimedia system .. 180
General notes ................................ 131 Function/notes ............................. 179
Hill start assist ............................... 131 General notes ................................ 179
Switching on/off ........................... 180
Q Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 125
QR code Switching on/off ........................... 125
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rear window wiper
Rescue card ..................................... 28 Replacing the wiper blade .............. 115
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 Switching on/off ........................... 113
Rear-view mirror
R Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 101
RACE START Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102
Important safety notes .................. 168 Reflective safety jacket .................... 285
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi- Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
cles) .................................................... 168 tem)
RACE TIMER (on-board computer, Important safety notes .................. 334
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 202 Refueling
Radio Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Selecting a station ......................... 195 Important safety notes .................. 144
see separate operating instructions Refueling process .......................... 145
Radio mode see Fuel
see also Digital Operator's Man- Remote control
ual .................................................. 243 Garage door opener ....................... 267
Radio-wave reception/transmis- Programming (garage door
sion in the vehicle opener) .......................................... 268
Declaration of conformity ................ 27 Replacing bulbs
Rain closing feature (panorama Brake lamp .................................... 111
roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 92 High-beam headlamps ................... 110
Reading lamp ..................................... 108 Important safety notes .................. 109
Rear compartment Installing/removing the cover
Setting the air vents ...................... 126 (front wheel arch) .......................... 110
Rear fog lamp Low-beam headlamps .................... 110
Display message ............................ 216 Overview of bulb types .................. 109
Replacing bulbs ............................. 111 Rear fog lamp ................................ 111
Switching on/off ........................... 106 Turn signals (front) ......................... 111
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 111
Index 17
Rescue card ......................................... 28 Seat

Reserve (fuel tank) Correct driver's seat position ........... 95
see Fuel Seat belts
Reserve fuel Adjusting the height ......................... 43
Display message ............................ 219 Cleaning ......................................... 283
Warning lamp ................................. 238 Correct usage .................................. 42
see Fuel Fastening ......................................... 43
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 125 Important safety guidelines ............. 41
Restraint system Introduction ..................................... 40
Display message ............................ 211 Releasing ......................................... 43
Introduction ..................................... 39 Warning lamp ................................. 231
Warning lamp ................................. 238 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43
Warning lamp (function) ................... 40 Seats
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 138 Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97
Reversing feature Adjusting (manually) ........................ 96
Roller sunblind ................................. 92 Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 99
Side windows ................................... 87 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Tailgate ............................................ 78 port .................................................. 98
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 97
Roller sunblind Cleaning the cover ......................... 283
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Folding the backrest (rear com-
sliding panel ..................................... 92 partment) forwards/back .............. 255
Roof carrier ........................................ 257 Important safety notes .................... 95
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Seat heating problem .................... 100
guidelines) ......................................... 284 Storing settings (memory func-
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 335 tion) ............................................... 104
Route guidance Switching seat heating on/off ......... 99
see also Digital Operator's Man- Securing cargo .................................. 256
ual .................................................. 243 Selecting a gear
see Automatic transmission
S Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 283
Safety Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 281
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53 Service center
see Occupant safety see Qualified specialist workshop
Safety system Service Center
see Driving safety systems see Qualified specialist workshop
SD card Service menu (on-board com-
Inserting ........................................ 249 puter) .................................................. 199
Inserting/removing ........................ 249 Service message
Removing ....................................... 249 see ASSYST PLUS
SD memory card Service products
see also Digital Operator's Man- Brake fluid ..................................... 333
ual .................................................. 243 Coolant (engine) ............................ 333
Search & Send Engine oil ....................................... 332
see also Digital Operator's Man- Fuel ................................................ 330
ual .................................................. 243 Important safety notes .................. 330
18 Index
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Important safety notes .................... 69

tem) ............................................... 334 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 71
Washer fluid ................................... 334 Loss ................................................. 73
Setting a speed Mechanical key ................................ 71
see Cruise control Positions (ignition lock) ................. 128
Setting the air distribution ............... 122 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 73
Setting the airflow ............................ 123 Starting the engine ........................ 130
Setting the date/time format SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 128
see also Digital Operator's Man- Smartphone
ual .................................................. 243 Starting the engine ........................ 130
Setting the language SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man- see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 243 ual .................................................. 243
Setting the time Snow chains ...................................... 305
see also Digital Operator's Man- Sound
ual .................................................. 243 Switching on/off ........................... 244
Settings Special seat belt retractor .................. 54
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 201 Specialist workshop ............................ 27
On-board computer ....................... 199 Speed, controlling
SETUP (on-board computer, see Cruise control
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 202 Speedometer
Side impact air bag ............................. 46 Activating/deactivating the addi-
Side marker lamp (display mes- tional speedometer ........................ 200
sage) ................................................... 217 Digital ............................................ 194
Side windows In the Instrument cluster ................. 32
Cleaning ......................................... 280 Segments ...................................... 189
Convenience closing feature ............ 88 Selecting the display unit ............... 199
Convenience opening feature .......... 87 SPORT handling mode
Important safety information ........... 86 Deactivating/activating
Opening/closing .............................. 87 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 65
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89 Warning lamp ................................. 236
Resetting ......................................... 89 Standing lamps
Reversing feature ............................. 87 Display message ............................ 216
SIRIUS services Switching on/off ........................... 106
see also Digital Operator's Man- Start-off assist
ual .................................................. 243 Activating ....................................... 167
Sliding sunroof Important safety notes .................. 167
see Panorama roof with power Start/Stop button
tilt/sliding panel Removing ....................................... 129
SmartKey Starting the engine ........................ 130
Changing the battery ....................... 72 Start/stop function
Changing the programming ............. 71 see ECO start/stop function
Checking the battery ....................... 72 Starting (engine) ................................ 129
Convenience closing feature ............ 88 Starting the engine
Convenience opening feature .......... 87 see Starting (engine)
Display message ............................ 230 STEER CONTROL .................................. 67
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 69
Index 19
Steering Obstruction detection ...................... 78

Display message ............................ 229 Opening dimensions ...................... 335
Steering assistant STEER CON- Opening/closing (from outside) .. 78, 83
TROL Opening/closing automatically
see STEER CONTROL from inside ....................................... 81
Steering wheel Opening/closing automatically
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 100 from outside .................................... 79
Button overview ............................... 33 Tank
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 190 see Fuel tank
Cleaning ......................................... 283 Tank content
Important safety notes .................. 100 Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Paddle shifters ............................... 142 Technical data
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 142 Capacities ...................................... 330
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 202 Information .................................... 328
Stowage compartments Tires/wheels ................................. 326
Armrest (front) ............................... 252 Vehicle data ................................... 335
Armrest (under) ............................. 253 TELEAID
Center console .............................. 252 Call priority .................................... 264
Center console (rear) ..................... 253 Downloading destinations
Cup holders ................................... 257 (COMAND) ..................................... 264
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 252 Downloading routes ....................... 267
Glove box ....................................... 252 Emergency call .............................. 261
Important safety information ......... 251 General notes ................................ 260
Map pockets .................................. 253 Geo fencing ................................... 267
Stowage net ................................... 253 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266
Stowage net ....................................... 253 MB info call button ........................ 263
Summer opening Remote vehicle locking .................. 265
see Convenience opening feature Roadside Assistance button .......... 262
Summer tires ..................................... 304 Search & Send ............................... 264
Sun visor ............................................ 259 Self-test ......................................... 261
Suspension setting Speed alert .................................... 267
AMG adaptive sport suspension System .......................................... 261
system ........................................... 169 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 267
Switching air-recirculation mode Vehicle Health Check .................... 266
on/off ................................................. 125 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265
Switching on media mode Telephone
Via the device list .......................... 249 Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 197
T Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ......................................... 247
Tachometer ........................................ 189 Authorizing a mobile phone via the
Tail lamps device manager (connecting) ......... 248
see Lights Connecting a mobile phone
Tailgate (device manager) ........................... 248
Display message ............................ 228 Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
Emergency unlocking ................. 82, 86 eral information) ............................ 247
Important safety notes .................... 77 Display message ............................ 229
Limiting the opening angle ............... 82 Introduction ................................... 196
20 Index
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 196 Tires

Number from the phone book ........ 197 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 322
Redialing ........................................ 197 Average weight of the vehicle
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 197 occupants (definition) .................... 320
see also Digital Operator's Man- Bar (definition) ............................... 320
ual .................................................. 243 Changing a wheel .......................... 322
Temperature Characteristics .............................. 320
Coolant .......................................... 190 Checking ........................................ 302
Coolant (on-board computer, Curb weight (definition) ................. 321
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201 Definition of terms ......................... 320
Engine oil (on-board computer, Direction of rotation ...................... 323
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 201 Display message ............................ 224
Outside temperature ...................... 189 Distribution of the vehicle occu-
Setting (climate control) ................ 122 pants (definition) ............................ 322
Transmission oil (on-board com- DOT (Department of Transporta-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 201 tion) (definition) ............................. 320
Through-loading feature ................... 254 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 202 (TIN) ............................................... 320
Tire pressure GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 309 (definition) ..................................... 321
Checking manually ........................ 308 General notes ................................ 326
Display message ............................ 224 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
Maximum ....................................... 308 inition) ........................................... 321
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 290 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Notes ............................................. 307 ing) (definition) .............................. 321
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 290 Important safety notes .................. 302
Recommended ............................... 305 Increased vehicle weight due to
Tire pressure loss warning system optional equipment (definition) ...... 321
General notes ................................ 308 Information on driving .................... 302
Important safety notes .................. 309 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 321
Restarting ...................................... 309 Labeling (overview) ........................ 317
Tire pressure monitor Load bearing index (definition) ...... 322
Checking the tire pressure elec- Load index ..................................... 319
tronically ........................................ 311 Load index (definition) ................... 321
Function/notes ............................. 309 M+S tires ....................................... 304
General notes ................................ 309 Maximum load on a tire (defini-
Important safety notes .................. 310 tion) ............................................... 321
Radio type approval for the tire Maximum loaded vehicle weight
pressure monitor ........................... 312 (definition) ..................................... 321
Restarting ...................................... 312 Maximum permissible tire pres-
Warning lamp ................................. 242 sure (definition) ............................. 321
Warning message .......................... 311 Maximum tire load ......................... 319
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 288 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 321
Important safety notes .................. 288 MOExtended tires .......................... 304
Storage location ............................ 287 Optional equipment weight (defi-
Tire pressure not reached .............. 290 nition) ............................................ 322
Tire pressure reached .................... 290 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
inition) ........................................... 322
Index 21
Replacing ....................................... 322 With front axle raised ..................... 298

Service life ..................................... 303 Towing eye ......................................... 286
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 322 Traction system
Speed rating (definition) ................ 321 see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
Storing ........................................... 323 tion System)
Structure and characteristics Traffic reports
(definition) ..................................... 320 see also Digital Operator's Man-
Summer tires ................................. 304 ual .................................................. 243
Temperature .................................. 317 Transmission
TIN (Tire Identification Number) see Automatic transmission
(definition) ..................................... 322 Transmission position display
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 322 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 136
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 322 Transporting the vehicle .................. 299
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 321 Traveling uphill
Tire size (data) ............................... 326 Brow of hill ..................................... 158
Tire size designation, load-bearing Driving downhill ............................. 158
capacity, speed rating .................... 317 Maximum gradient-climbing capa-
Tire tread ....................................... 303 bility ............................................... 158
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 322 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
Total load limit (definition) ............. 322 tions) .................................................. 283
Traction ......................................... 316 Trip computer (on-board com-
Traction (definition) ....................... 322 puter) .................................................. 193
Tread wear ..................................... 316 Trip odometer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Calling up ....................................... 193
Standards ...................................... 316 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 194
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Trunk
Standards (definition) .................... 321 Emergency release button ............... 86
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 322 Important safety notes .................... 83
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 321 Opening (automatically from out-
see Flat tire side) ................................................. 84
Tool Opening (from outside the vehi-
see Vehicle tool kit cle, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) ........ 80, 84
Top Tether ............................................ 56 Opening automatically from
Tow-starting inside ............................................... 85
Emergency engine starting ............ 300 Trunk lid
Important safety notes .................. 297 see Tailgate
Installing the towing eye ................ 298 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 335
Removing the towing eye ............... 298 Turn signals
Towing a trailer Display message ............................ 215
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 111
gram) ............................................... 66 Switching on/off ........................... 107
Towing away Two-way radio
Important safety guidelines ........... 297 Frequencies ................................... 328
Installing the towing eye ................ 298 Installation ..................................... 328
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 299 Transmission output (maximum) .... 328
Removing the towing eye ............... 298 Type identification plate
Transporting the vehicle ................ 299 see Vehicle identification plate
With both axles on the ground ....... 299
22 Index
U Vehicle identification number

see VIN
Unlocking Vehicle identification plate .............. 329
Emergency unlocking ....................... 76 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 286
From inside the vehicle (central Ventilation
unlocking button) ............................. 75
Setting the vents ........................... 126
Upshift indicator (on-board com-
Video
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 201
Operating the DVD ......................... 196
USB devices
see also Digital Operator's Man-
Connecting to the Media Inter- ual .................................................. 243
face ............................................... 250 VIN
Seat ............................................... 330
V Type plate ...................................... 329
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 259
Vehicle W
Correct use ...................................... 27 Warning and indicator lamps
Data acquisition ............................... 28 ABS ................................................ 234
Display message ............................ 226 Active Brake Assist ........................ 241
Equipment ....................................... 26 Brakes ........................................... 233
Individual settings .......................... 199 Check Engine ................................. 238
Limited Warranty ............................. 28 Coolant .......................................... 239
Loading .......................................... 313 Distance warning ........................... 241
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 77
ESP® .............................................. 235
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 69
ESP® OFF ....................................... 236
Lowering ........................................ 326
Fuel tank ........................................ 238
Maintenance .................................... 26
Overview .......................................... 32
Parking for a long period ................ 149
Reserve fuel ................................... 238
Pulling away ................................... 131
Restraint system ............................ 238
Raising ........................................... 324
Seat belt ........................................ 231
Reporting problems ......................... 27
SPORT handling mode ................... 236
Securing from rolling away ............ 324
Tire pressure monitor .................... 242
Transporting .................................. 299
Warning triangle ................................ 286
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 76
Washer fluid
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 69
Vehicle data ................................... 335 Display message ............................ 229
Vehicle battery Weather display (COMAND)
see Battery (vehicle) see also Digital Operator's Man-
Vehicle data ual .................................................. 243
Wheel and tire combinations
Roof load (maximum) ..................... 335
Trunk load (maximum) ................... 335 Tires ............................................... 326
Vehicle data (off-road driving) Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 326
Approach/departure angle ............ 336 Wheel chock ...................................... 324
Maximum gradient climbing abil- Wheels
ity .................................................. 336 Changing a wheel .......................... 322
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 335 Checking ........................................ 302
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 77 Cleaning ......................................... 280
Information on driving .................... 302
Index 23
Interchanging/changing ................ 322

Mounting a new wheel ................... 325
Removing a wheel .......................... 325
Storing ........................................... 323
Tightening torque ........................... 326
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 326
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel .......................... 323
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 212
Operation ......................................... 46
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 123
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 276
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 229
Problem (malfunction) ................... 115
Rear window wiper ........................ 113
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 113
Switching on/off ........................... 112
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 154
Snow chains .................................. 305
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 304
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 304
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 281
Replacing (rear window) ................ 115
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 283
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 123
24 Digital Operator's Manual
Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

ual
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. General notes
The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-
Please observe the information about the oper-
hensive and specifically adapted information on
ation of the controller (Y page 244).
your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual via the multimedia system. Content pages
i You will not incur any costs when calling up The content pages can be accessed by means of
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital a visual search, a keyword search or using the
Operator's Manual works without connecting contents.
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
RVisual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
RKeyword search
X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
The keyword search allows you to search for a
the controller.
keyword by entering characters.
X To display in full-screen or animation: slide
RContents
8 the controller to the left :.
You can select individual sections in the con-
X To select information texts or save book-
tents.
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- right ;.
ted for safety reasons while driving. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X To exit a content page: select % sym-
Operation bol ?.
X To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
ual
X To switch functions to the multimedia
X Press the Ø button in the center console. system using the buttons on the center
The overview relating to the vehicle appears. console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by button.
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
X Confirm 7 the message about the warning
ator's Manual remains open in the back-
and safety notes. ground.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 25
Protecting the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Introduction
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations
that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to
and humanity into account. dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-
You too can help to protect the environment use them. Observe the relevant environmental
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- rules and regulations when disposing of materi-
als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-
tally responsible manner.
ronment.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note
You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same
Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
parts.
sumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
the following areas of your vehicle:
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
Rdoors
them. Rdoor pillars
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills
to environmental protection. You should Rseats
therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit
Ralways have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster
qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console
Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
is stationary. qualified specialist workshop.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of
from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
braking.
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Z
26 Service and vehicle operation
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- Service and vehicle operation
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Maintenance
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
Introduction
cle. Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to when taking the vehicle to an authorized
strict quality control. Every part has been spe- Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service
cifically developed, manufactured or selected advisor will enter every service into your Main-
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. tenance Booklet on your behalf.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine Roadside Assistance
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
Mercedes-Benz models. gram offers technical help in the event of a
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
necessary service and repair work. In addition, hours a day, 365 days a year.
strategically located parts delivery centers pro- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
vide quick and reliable parts service. (USA)
Always specify the vehicle identification number 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts (Y page 329). For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet
Operator's Manual (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-
ment wallet.
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of Change of address or change of own-
your vehicle available at the time of this Oper- ership
ator's Manual going to print. Country-specific
differences are possible. Bear in mind that In the event of a change of address, please send
your vehicle may not feature all functions us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
described here. This also applies to safety- Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
relevant systems and functions. The equip- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
ment in your vehicle may therefore differ from (USA) at the hotline number
that shown in the descriptions and illustra- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
tions. Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
The original purchase agreement lists all sys- ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
tems installed in your vehicle.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
Should you have any questions concerning ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
equipment and operation, please consult an next owner.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you have purchased a used car, please send us
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
let are important documents and should be kept Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
in the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Operating safety 27
Operating safety loose floormats and do not place floormats on

top of one another.
Declarations of conformity
Introduction
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- ! If the engine is switched off and equipment
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is on the diagnostics connection is used, the
subject to the two following two conditions: 1) starter battery may discharge.
These devices may not cause harmful interfer- Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
interference received, including interference mation being reset, for example. This may lead
that may cause undesired operation. Changes to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
or modifications not expressly approved by the the next emissions test during the main inspec-
party responsible for compliance could void the tion.
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt Qualified specialist workshop
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
not cause interference, and (2) These devices fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
must accept any interference, including inter- specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
ference that may cause undesired operation of correctly carry out the work required on your
the device." vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a Rwork relevant to safety
qualified specialist workshop. Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
G WARNING
Ralterations, installation work and modifica-
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics tions
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Rwork on electronic components
operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is a risk of an accident. Correct use
Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
G WARNING your vehicle:
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the Rthe safety notes in this manual
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Rtechnical data for the vehicle
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Rtraffic rules and regulations
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are vehicles
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure Problems with your vehicle
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
Z
28 Data stored in the vehicle
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact These data memories temporarily or perma-
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi- nently store technical information about:
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- Rthe vehicle's operating state
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
Introduction
Rincidents
isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec- Rmalfunctions
essary, contact us at one of the following In general, this technical information docu-
addresses. ments the state of a component, a module, a
In the USA system or the surroundings.
Customer Assistance Center These include, for example:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Roperating conditions of system components,
3 Mercedes Drive e.g. fluid levels
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its
In Canada individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
Customer Relations Department ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. position
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Rmalfunctions and defects in important system
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 components, e.g. lights, brakes
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
Limited Warranty ment, intervention of stability control sys-
tems
! Follow the instructions in this manual about Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
the proper operation of your vehicle as well as
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
about possible vehicle damage. Damage to
and can be used to:
your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-
ventions against these instructions is not cov- Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited tions and defects
Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
ranty. dent
Roptimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
QR codes for the rescue card movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap mation can be read from the event data memory
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the and malfunction data memory.
event of an accident, rescue services can use Services include, for example:
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue Rrepair services
card contains the most important information Rservice processes
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the Rwarranties
routing of the electric cables. Rquality assurance
You can find more information under The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-
mation is obtained from it, if required.
Data stored in the vehicle After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory
Data storage or is continually overwritten.
A wide range of electronic components in your When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
vehicle contain data memories. ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
Information on copyright 29
tion with other information (if necessary, under These data can help provide a better under-
consultation with an authorized expert), could standing of the circumstances in which crashes
be traced to a person. and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-
Introduction
Examples include:
tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
Raccident reports
under normal driving conditions and no personal
Rdamage to the vehicle data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)
Rwitness statements are recorded. However, other parties, such as
Further additional functions that have been con- law enforcement could combine the EDR data
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow with the type of personally identifying data rou-
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
cle as well. The additional functions include, for Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
example, vehicle location in case of an emer- to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and
gency. special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforce-
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) ment, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- data from the EDR is commercially available,
tem. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
For additional information please refer to the disclaims any and all liability arising from the
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's extraction of this information by unauthorized
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- Mercedes-Benz personnel.
tions. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
Event data recorders lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data ment; by federal, state or local government; in
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near as required by law.
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy- Warning: The EDR is a component of the
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
performed. The EDR is designed to record data may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems tem Module and other systems.
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record This means that in the event of such conflict, the
such data as: federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
RHow various systems in your vehicle were 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
operating
RWhether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened Information on copyright
RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and General information
RHow fast the vehicle was traveling. Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle and its electronic
Z
30 Information on copyright
components is available on the following web-

site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Introduction
Registered trademarks
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman
International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
Cockpit 31
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Steering wheel paddle shift- D Climate control systems 116
ers 142
E Ignition lock 128
; Combination switch 107
F Adjusts the steering wheel 100
= Instrument cluster 32
G Cruise control lever 159
? Horn
H Electric parking brake 148
A DIRECT SELECT lever 136
I Light switch 105
B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display 173 J Diagnostics connection 27
C Overhead control panel 38 K Opens the hood 273

32 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Speedometer with segments 189 = Multifunction display 192
Warning and indicator lamps: ? Tachometer 189
L Low-beam headlamps 106 6 Restraint system 40
T Parking lamps 106 ü Seat belt not fastened 231
K High-beam headlamps 107 M SPORT handling mode
÷ ESP® 235 (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 236
Electric parking brake R Rear fog lamp 106
applied (red) N Fog lamps 106
F (USA only) ; Check Engine 238
! (Canada only) 238 h Tire pressure monitor 242
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 238 A Coolant temperature gauge 190
· Distance warning 241 Warning and indicator lamps:
å ESP® OFF 235 ? Coolant too hot/cold 239
! ABS malfunctioning 234 B Fuel level indicator
Brakes 233 Warning and indicator lamps:
$ (USA only) æ Reserve fuel 238
J (Canada only)
; #! Turn signals 107
Multifunction steering wheel 33
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 192 ? ò Opens the menu list
; Multimedia system display 9 : Selects a menu
a Confirms the selection
= ~ Rejects or ends a call % Back
6 Makes or accepts a call Operates the on-board com-
Further telephone functions 196 puter 190
W X Adjusts volume ? Switches off voice-
8 Mute operated control for naviga-
? Switches on voice- tion or the Voice Control Sys-
operated control for naviga- tem
tion or the Voice Control Sys-
tem
i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 i In vehicles with multimedia system

you can find further information: COMAND you can find further information:
Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Ron the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual Operator's Manual
Ron voice-controlled navigation in the man- Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
ufacturer's operating instructions the Digital Operator's Manual
Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
34 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: Multimedia system (see the A è ECO start/stop func-
separate operating instruction 131
tions)
B £ Hazard warning lamps 107
; c Seat heating 99
C PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
tor lamps 40
AMG adaptive sport suspen-
sion system (left side) 169 D DYNAMIC SELECT button 134
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: å Mercedes-AMG vehi-
adjusts the exhaust flap of cles: ESP® 65
the AMG performance
exhaust system (right side) 133 E Activates the driving dynam-
ics display (vehicles with the
= Ã Downhill Speed Regu- ON&OFFROAD package) 172
lation 170
? c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC 174
Center console 35
Center console, lower section
At a glance
: Ashtray 259 ? Stowage compartment with
Cigarette lighter 260 Media Interface 251
Socket A Multimedia system control-
Stowage compartment 251 ler (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
; Cup holder 257
= Cup holder 257
36
At a glance Center console
i Mercedes-AMG vehicles Function Page

Function Page ? DYNAMIC SELECT controller 135
: Ashtray 259 A Cup holder 257
Cigarette lighter 260
B Stowage compartment with
Socket Media Interface 251
Stowage compartment 251
C Multimedia system control-
; Selector lever 138 ler (see the separate operat-
= ing instructions)
Manual gearshifting (perma-
nent setting) 142
Door control panel 37
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 75 B W Opens/closes the side
windows 87
; % & Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 75 C n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
= r45= Saves side windows in the rear
the seat and exterior mirror compartment 59
settings 103
D q Opens the cargo com-
? Adjusts the seats electrically 97 partment 81
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically 101
38 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: u Switches the rear com- D G SOS button (mbrace
partment interior lighting system) 261
on/off 108
E F Breakdown assistance
; p Switches the right- call button (mbrace system) 262
hand reading lamp on/off 108
F Eyeglasses compartment 252
= | Switches the front inte-
rior lighting/automatic inte- G 3 Opens/closes the pan-
rior lighting control off 108 orama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel with roller sun-
? ï MB Info call button blinds 91
(mbrace system) 263
H c Switches the front inte-
A Rear-view mirror 102 rior lighting on 108
B Sets the compass 270 I p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off 108
C Buttons for the garage door
opener 268
Occupant safety 39
Panic alarm As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 95).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 44).
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
Safety
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
X To activate: press and hold the ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
! button : for approx. one second. protect against objects penetrating the vehicle
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the from the outside.
alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can
X To deactivate: press ! button : again. be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
or Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 51).
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. See "Children in the vehicle" for information on
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function children traveling with you in the vehicle as well
or KEYLESS‑GO as on child restraint systems (Y page 53).
X Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Occupant safety Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
Introduction to the restraint system
restraint system may then not perform its
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- intended protective function and may fail in an
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during fatal injury.
an accident. Never modify parts of the restraint system.
The restraint system comprises: Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
RSeat belt system components or their software.
RAir bags
If it is necessary to modify components of the
RChild restraint system restraint system to accommodate a person with
RChild seat securing systems disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-
The components of the restraint system work in Benz Center for details. USA only: for further
conjunction with each other. They can only information contact our Customer Assistance
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
vehicle occupants: (1‑800‑367‑6372).
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
(Y page 42) driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 95)
Z
40 Occupant safety
Restraint system warning lamp The indicator lamps display the status of the
front-passenger front air bag.
The functions of the restraint system are RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
regular intervals while the engine is running. onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
good time. front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
Safety
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
dent.
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
system warning lamp:
front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
on Depending on the person in the front-passenger
Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
engine running either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
Rlights up again while the engine is running lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
G WARNING
RChildren in a child restraint system:
If the restraint system is malfunctioning, whether the front-passenger front air bag is
restraint system components may be trig- enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
gered unintentionally or may not deploy as led child restraint system, and the age and
intended during an accident. This can affect size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
for example the Emergency Tensioning the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (Y page 46) and on "Chil-
Device or the air bag. This poses an increased dren in the vehicle" (Y page 53). There you
risk of injury or even fatal injury. will also find instructions on rearward and
Have the restraint system checked and forward-facing child restraint systems on the
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as front-passenger seat.
soon as possible. RAll other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (Y page 46). Be sure to
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 40) and "Air bags"
(Y page 44). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
part of the Occupant Classification System thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
(OCS).
Occupant safety 41
occupant in the best position in relation to the incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
air bag. injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
The seat belt system comprises: dent or when braking or changing direction
RSeat belts abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front or even fatal injury.
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
and the outer seat belts in the rear
ting properly.
Safety
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt The components of the restraint system work in
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- conjunction with each other. They can only
ted any further. deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the vehicle occupants:
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the (Y page 42)
backrest. Rhave the seat and head restraint adjusted
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor- properly (Y page 95)
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of G WARNING
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the of protection if you have not moved the back-
vehicle occupant. rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are ing or in the event of an accident, you could
synchronized with the front air bags, which slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu- poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
pants during an accident. injury.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, Adjust the seat properly before beginning
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other- is in an almost vertical position and that the
wise, the Emergency Tensioning Device and
side impact air bag could be triggered in the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
event of an accident and would need to be across the center of your shoulder.
replaced.
G WARNING
Important safety notes Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
is required by law in: tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
Rall 50 states
form its intended protective function. An
Rthe U.S. territories
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
Rthe District of Columbia
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
Rall Canadian provinces
dent or when braking or changing direction
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey. or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
G WARNING 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot systems.
perform its intended protective function. An
Z
42 Occupant safety
If a child younger than twelve years old and system cannot provide the best level of protec-
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the tion.
vehicle:
G WARNING
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- If you feed seat belts through the opening in
cle. The child restraint system must be appro- the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
priate to the age, weight and size of the child damaged or may even break in the event of an
Ralways observe the instructions and safety accident. This poses an increased risk of
notes on "Children in the vehicle" injury or even fatal injury.
Safety
(Y page 53) in addition to the child restraint Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
system manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions Never modify the seat belt system.
Ralways observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system Proper use of the seat belts
(OCS)" (Y page 46)
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
G WARNING (Y page 41).
The seat belts may not perform their intended All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
protective function if: belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
dirty, bleached or dyed is in motion.
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
extremely dirty that:
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
into the belt buckle belonging to that seat
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body
fied.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, coat.
although the damage may not be visible, e.g. Rthe seat belt is not twisted
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. tributed over the area of the belt.
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routed
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy across the center of your shoulder
when necessary. This poses an increased risk The shoulder section of the seat belt should
of injury or even fatal injury. not touch your neck or be routed under your
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- arm or behind your back. Where possible,
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lap
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
as low down as possible
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
immediately at a qualified specialist work- This applies particularly to pregnant women.
shop. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
Only use seat belts that have been approved for section of the belt.
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this ted or fragile objects
seat is designed for the standard three-point If you have such items located on or in your
seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint these in a suitable place.
Ronly one person is using a seat belt
Occupant safety 43
Infants and children must never travel sitting The shoulder section of the seat belt must
on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event always be routed across the center of the shoul-
of an accident, they could be crushed der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. X To raise: slide the belt outlet up.
Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
the seat belt is also being used by one of the tions.
vehicle's occupants X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
Also ensure that there are never objects the belt outlet down.
between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.
X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
Safety
Seat belts are only intended to secure and position and make sure that the belt outlet
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the engages.
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads (Y page 251). All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts vehicle. Further information can be found under
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 54).
(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (Y page 42). Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Basic illustration
X Adjust the seat (Y page 95). Belt warning for the driver and front
The seat backrest must be in an almost passenger
upright position. The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
let. pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :. continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section a warning tone.
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
body. already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engine is started. If the front doors are closed
and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt has
not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning
lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As
soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat
belts are fastened or a front door is opened
again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
Z
44 Occupant safety
seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- Always make sure that there are no objects
tened. between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph pants.
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with your journey. Always make sure that the seat
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the is in an almost upright position. The center of
driver or front passenger have fastened their the head restraint must support the head at
seat belts. about eye level.
Safety
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
ing is activated again. tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
Air bags RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
Introduction ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the

door or side window. You may otherwise be in
The installation point of an air bag can be rec- the deployment area of the air bags.
ognized by the AIRBAG marking. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front
An air bag complements the correctly fastened of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
air bag provides additional protection in appli- be in the deployment area of the air bag.
cable accident situations. RFor this reason, always secure persons less
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
different air bag systems function independ- tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
ently from one another (Y page 51). be worn correctly.
However, no system available today can com- If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. observe the following notes:
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury RAlways secure children under twelve years of
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
which the air bag must be deployed. child restraint systems.
RChild restraint systems should be installed on
Important safety notes the rear seats.
ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child
G WARNING restraint system on the front-passenger seat
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, when the front-passenger front air bag is
the air bag cannot protect as intended and deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-
could even cause additional injury when
passenger front air bag is deactivated
deployed. This poses an increased risk of (Y page 40).
injury or even fatal injury. RAlways observe the instructions and safety
To avoid hazardous situations, always make notes on the "Occupant Classification System
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: (OCS)" (Y page 46) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (Y page 53) in addition to the child
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, restraint system manufacturer's installation
including pregnant women and operating instructions.
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great-
est possible distance to the air bags
Rfollow the following instructions
Occupant safety 45
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the front-passenger side may be triggered
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before and have to be replaced.
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
Safety
Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
the pockets of your clothing. Store such deploys in front of and above the glove box.
objects in a suitable place When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
G WARNING pants in the front seats.
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer informs you about the status of the front-
function correctly. There is an increased risk passenger front air bag (Y page 40).
of injury. The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (Y page 46). The
G WARNING PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
Sensors to control the air bags are located in not lit (Y page 47)
the doors. Modifications or work not per- Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a
formed correctly to the doors or door panel- high accident severity
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air Knee bags
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Front air bags

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
! Do not place heavy objects on the front- column and front-passenger knee bag ; under
passenger seat. This could cause the system the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the knee bags are triggered together with the front
event of an accident, the restraint systems on air bags.
Z
46 Occupant safety
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro- the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
tection for the occupants in the front seats. side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
Side impact air bags of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
G WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- Window curtain air bags
vent deployment of the air bags integrated
Safety
into the seats. Consequently, the air bags

cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
could be adversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into

the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side
impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed
on the side on which the impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
Front side impact air bags : and rear side deployed in other accident situations
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol- (Y page 51).
ster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers addi- Occupant Classification System
tional pelvis protection for occupants in the (OCS)
front seats. However, it does not protect the:
RHead Introduction
RNeck
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
RArms egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side Depending on that result, the front-passenger
impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
the side on which the impact occurs. either enabled or deactivated.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger The system does not deactivate:
side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe OCS system detects that the front- Rthe window curtain air bag
passenger seat is occupied or Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
Occupant safety 47
Requirements The indicator lamps inform you whether the

front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
To be classified correctly, the front passenger enabled.
must sit:
X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rin an almost upright position with their back ignition lock.
against the seat backrest The system carries out self-diagnostics.
Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
If the front passenger does not observe these AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simul-
Safety
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica- taneously for approximately six seconds.
tion, e.g. because the front passenger: The indicator lamps display the status of the
Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- front-passenger front air bag.
selves on a vehicle armrest RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are
from the seat cushion off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be in the event of an accident.
sure to observe the correct positioning of the RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-
child restraint system. Never place objects passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a then not be deployed in the event of an acci-
cushion. The entire base of the child restraint dent.
system must always rest on the seat cushion of If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as lamp shows the status of the front-passenger
flat as possible against the backrest of the front- front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
passenger seat. indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
The child restraint system must not touch the If the status of the front-passenger front air bag
roof or be subjected to a load by the head changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest display message appears in the instrument clus-
and the head restraint position accordingly. ter (Y page 213). When the front-passenger
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function seat is occupied, always pay attention to the
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be
tem manufacturer's installation and operating aware of the status of the front-passenger front
instructions. air bag both before and during the journey.
G WARNING
Operation of Occupant Classification
System (OCS) If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front-
passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp Rthe classification of the person in the front-
; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp passenger seat is correct and the front-
Z
48 Occupant safety
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- Always move the front-passenger seat as far
bled in accordance with the person in the back as possible and fully retract the seat
front-passenger seat cushion length. Always make sure that the
Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
back as far back as possible. the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
Rthe person is seated correctly. belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
Safety
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt

front air bag is correct.
sash guide and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. Always observe the child
G WARNING
restraint system manufacturer's installation
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child instructions.
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If OCS determines that:
lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag RThe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
can deploy in the event of an accident. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses lights up after the system self-test and
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. remains lit. This indicates that the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
child of up to twelve months old, in a standard
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR- system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
to the child can occur.
But even in the case of a twelve-month-old
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp child, in a standard child restraint system, the
stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can
restraint system on the front-passenger seat. go out after the system self-test. This indi-
You can find more information on OCS under cates that the front-passenger front air bag is
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys- activated. The result of the classification is
tem" (Y page 50). dependent on, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
G WARNING recommended that you install the child
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
and you position the front-passenger seat too
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
close to the dashboard, in the event of an indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
accident, the child could: the system self-test depending on the result
Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
cator lamp is lit, for example
Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Occupant safety 49
as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per- in the event of an accident with high deceler-
son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
even fatal injury.
lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat. In this case the front-passenger seat may not
RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by an be used. Do not install a child restraint system
adult or a person of adult stature, the on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp pant Classification System (OCS) checked
goes out after the system self-test. This indi- and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
Safety
cates that the front-passenger front air bag is cialist workshop.
activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to G WARNING
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 53). If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
When the Occupant Classification System lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
system warning lamp on the instrument cluster not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator this case, the front-passenger front air bag
lamp light up simultaneously. The front- cannot perform its intended protective func-
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident. tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) passenger seat.
checked and repaired immediately at a qualified That person could, for example, come into
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom- contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
Benz Center for this purpose.
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
even fatal injury.
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
repair work carried out at a qualified specialist When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that always ensure that:
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Rthe classification of the person in the front-
for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- passenger seat is correct and the front-
mends that you only use seat accessories that passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. bled in accordance with the person in the
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not front-passenger seat
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- rectly fastened seatbelt
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved
the front-passenger front air bag is either ena- as far back as possible
bled or deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
System self-test passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
G DANGER
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do immediately at a qualified specialist work-
not light up during the system self-test, the shop.
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
Z
50 Occupant safety
G WARNING After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
Objects between the seat surface and the lamp displays the status of the front-passenger
child restraint system could affect OCS oper- front air bag (Y page 47). If the front-passenger
ation. This could result in the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
air bag not functioning as intended during an BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds
accident. This poses an increased risk of and then goes out.
injury or even fatal injury. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
Do not place any objects between the seat
Safety
lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

surface and the child restraint system. The front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
entire base of the child restraint system must indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
always rest on the seat cushion of the front- For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- lems with the Occupant Classification System"
facing child restraint system must, as far as (Y page 50).
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 49).
Occupant safety 51
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
BAG OFF indicator lamp rect.
lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 47).
passenger seat is occu-
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
pied by an adult or a per-
passenger seat may not be used.
son of a stature corre-
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Safety
sponding to that of an
adult. Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
does not light up and/or seat.
does not stay on.
X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
Roccupied with the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

Devices and air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
Important safety notes
tection in an accident. There is an increased
G WARNING risk of injury.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
been deployed. There is a risk of injury. ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a bag replaced.
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
It is important for your safety and that of your
cialist workshop as soon as possible. passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
Z
52 Occupant safety
and to have any malfunctioning air bags An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags triggered, if:
continue to perform their protective function for Rthe ignition is switched on
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
Rthe components of the restraint system are
G WARNING operational. You can find further information
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page 40)
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-
Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
tional and are unable to perform their inten- the belt buckle of the respective front seat
Safety
ded protective function. This poses an

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. compartment are triggered independently of the
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency lock status of the seat belts.
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a If the restraint system control unit detects a
qualified specialist workshop. more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independ-
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered ently of each other in certain frontal collision
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, situations:
and a small amount of powder may also be RFront air bags as well as driver's and front-
released. The 6 restraint system warning passenger knee bags
lamp lights up. RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- mines that deployment can offer additional
ing. The powder that is released generally does protection to that provided by the seat belt
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
short-term breathing difficulties in people with deactivated depending on the person on the
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
immediately or open the window in order to pre- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
vent breathing difficulties. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning BAG indicator lamps (Y page 40).
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. In the
which may require special handling and regard first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled
for the environment. National guidelines must with propellant gas. The front air bag is fully
be observed during disposal. In California, see deployed with the maximum amount of propel-
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ lant gas if a second deployment threshold is
Perchlorate/index.cfm. reached within a few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
Method of operation sioning Devices and the air bags is determined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint acceleration which occurs at various points in
system control unit evaluates important physi- the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- nature. Deployment should take place in good
eration, such as: time at the start of the collision.
Rduration The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rdirection and the direction of the force are essentially
Rintensity determined by:
Based on the evaluation of this data, the Rthe distribution of forces during the collision
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- Rthe collision angle
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle
rear collision.
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
Children in the vehicle 53
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do How the air bag system works is determined
they provide an indication of air bag deploy- by the severity of the accident detected,
ment. especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with- eration and the apparent type of accident:
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if RFrontal collision
only parts which are relatively easily deformed RSide impact
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
RRollover
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-
Safety
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- Automatic measures after an acci-
bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs dent
as a result.
If the restraint system control unit detects a side Immediately after an accident, the following
impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable measures are implemented, depending on the
components of the restraint system are activa- type and severity of the impact:
ted independently of each other depending on Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated
the apparent type of accident. Rthe emergency lighting is activated
RSide impact air bags on the side where the Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked
impact takes place, independently of the Rthe front side windows are lowered
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply
the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer
seats in the second row is cut off
Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side deploys under the following call
conditions:
- the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or Children in the vehicle
- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, Accident statistics show that children secured
independently of the use of the seat belt and in the rear seats are safer than children secured
independently of whether the front- in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
passenger seat is occupied Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children
determines that deployment can offer addi- are generally better protected there.
tional protection in this situation If a child younger than twelve years old and
RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
front-passenger side in certain situations vehicle:
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
determines that deployment can offer addi- system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
tional protection to that provided by the seat The child restraint system must be appropri-
belt ate to the age, weight and size of the child
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The different air bag systems work independ- notes in this section in addition to the child
ently of each other. restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (Y page 46)
Z
54 Children in the vehicle
G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened

without a booster seat.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. Special seat belt retractor
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
G WARNING
parking position P.
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
Rstart the engine.
child restraint system will no longer be
Safety
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
an accident and injury. portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
When leaving the vehicle, always take the be immediately refastened. There is an
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
G WARNING the special seat belt retractor and secure the
If persons, particularly children are subjected child restraint system properly.
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt
retractor. When activated, the special seat belt
vehicle. retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot
slacken once the child seat is secured.
G WARNING Installing a child restraint system:
If the child restraint system is subjected to X Make sure you observe the child restraint
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- system manufacturer's installation instruc-
dren may burn themselves on these parts, tions.
particularly on the metal parts of the child X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. let.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
you, always ensure that the child restraint Activating the special seat belt retractor:
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child reel retract it again.
restraint system has been exposed to direct While the seat belt is retracting, you should
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
child in it. Never leave children unattended in retractor is enabled.
the vehicle. X Push the child restraint system down so that
the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
Removing the child restraint system and deac-
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
tivating the special seat belt retractor:
properly. Particular attention must be paid to
children. X Make sure you observe the child restraint
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt system manufacturer's installation instruc-
(Y page 41) and the notes on correct use of seat tions.
belts (Y page 42). X Press the release button of the seat belt
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back
proper seat belt positioning for children over towards the belt sash guide.
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
Child restraint system G WARNING

The use of seat belts and child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
is required by law in: tems which have been damaged or subjected
Rall 50 states to a load in an accident can no longer protect
Rthe U.S. territories as intended. The child cannot then be
Rthe District of Columbia
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
Rall Canadian provinces
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
Safety
If you install a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest fatal.
must be folded back as far as possible. Replace child restraint systems which have
You can obtain further information about the been damaged or subjected to a load in an
correct child restraint system from any author- accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. ing systems on the child restraint system
G WARNING checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
again.
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained The securing systems of child restraint systems
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or are:
sudden changes of direction. There is an Rthe seat belt system
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe Top Tether anchorages
system manufacturer's installation instruc- If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
that the base of the child restraint system is information on the "Occupant Classification
always resting completely on the seat cush- System (OCS)" (Y page 46). There you will also
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under find information on deactivating the front-
or behind the child restraint system. Only use passenger front air bag.
child restraint systems with the original cover All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers. RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
G WARNING
213 and 210.2
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in responds to the standards can be found on an
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a instruction label on the child restraint system.
sudden change in direction. The child This confirmation can also be found in the instal-
restraint system could be thrown about, strik- lation instructions that are included with the
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased child restraint system.
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing

objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
lines" (Y page 251).
Z
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
ing system systems are installed on the left and right of the
rear seats.
G WARNING Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
do not offer sufficient protection for children to the manufacturer's instructions.
whose weight combined with the child
restraint system is greater than 65 lbs (29 kg)
Safety
and who are secured using the safety belt Top Tether
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be Introduction
restrained correctly. This poses an increased Top Tether provides an additional connection
risk of injury or even fatal injury. between the child restraint system secured with
If the child and the child restraint system a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
together weigh more than 65 lbs (29 kg), only This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
If the child restraint system is equipped with a
use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint sys-
Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
tems with which the child is also secured with
the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child
restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if
available. G WARNING
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
lation and operating instructions for the child could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
restraint system used. dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- direction. As a result, child restraint systems
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged cannot perform their intended protective
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing function. Rear seat backrests that are not
rings locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
! When installing the child restraint system, in the event of an accident. This poses an
make sure that the seat belt for the middle increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
otherwise be damaged.
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-
ests so that they are in an upright position.
If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked,

the red lock verification indicator will be visible
(Y page 255).
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
Top Tether anchorages Make sure that:

RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ; as shown
RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted
RTop Tether belt ? is routed between the
rear seat backrest and the cargo compart-
ment cover if the cargo compartment cover
is installed
X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply
Safety
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
X Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 98). Make sure
that you do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of Top Tether belt ?.
Child restraint system on the front-

passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
The Top Tether anchorages are located on the in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
rear side of the rear seat backrests. Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints: the child restraint system on a rear seat.
X Move head restraint : up. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
X Route Top Tether belt ? under head restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
restraint : between the two head restraint always observe the instructions and safety
bars. notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (Y page 46).
Vehicles without adjustable head restraints: You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
X Top Tether belt with one belt strap: route a result of:
Top Tether belt ? centrally over head Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-
restraint :. passenger seat
or Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front-
X Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route passenger front air bag
one Top Tether belt ? to the left and one to Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child
the right past the side of head restraint :. restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
All vehicles: board
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Always comply with Rearward-facing child restraint system
the child restraint system manufacturer's If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-
installation instructions when doing so. facing child restraint system on the front-
X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether passenger seat, always make sure that the
belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (Y page 40) is the front-
passenger front air bag deactivated.
Z
Always observe the child restraint system man- Override feature for:
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- Rthe rear doors (Y page 59)
tions.
Rthe rear side windows (Y page 59)
Forward-facing child restraint system G WARNING

If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward- If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
facing child restraint system on the front- cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
passenger seat, always move the front- Rrelease the parking brake.
passenger seat as far back as possible. Fully
Safety
retract the seat cushion length. The entire base Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
of the child restraint system must always rest on parking position P.
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Rstart the engine.
The backrest of the child restraint system must
lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load an accident and injury.
by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the When leaving the vehicle, always take the
seat backrest and the head restraint position
accordingly. Always make sure that the shoul- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
der belt strap is correctly routed from the vehi- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
cle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap G WARNING
must be routed forward and down from the vehi- If persons, particularly children are subjected
cle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle
belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accord- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
ingly. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
Always observe the child restraint system man- fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- vehicle.
tions.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
Child-proof locks direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Important safety notes dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
G WARNING restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
could: you, always ensure that the child restraint
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
or road users
restraint system has been exposed to direct
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
traffic child in it. Never leave children unattended in
Roperate vehicle equipment and become the vehicle.
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Driving safety systems 59
Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
Safety
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
You secure each door individually with the child- Unsecured animals could also be flung around
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside. cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are work- cle. Always secure animals properly during
ing properly. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock port box.
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side win- Driving safety systems
dows
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 60)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 60)
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 61)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 63)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 66)
X To activate/deactivate: press button :. RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 67)
If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 67)
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is Important safety notes
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for maintaining the distance to the
Z
60 Driving safety systems
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in play messages which may be shown in the
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt instrument cluster (Y page 205).
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance Braking
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
as effectively as possible when there is ade- brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
quate contact between the tires and the road uation is over.
surface. Please pay special attention to the X To make a full brake application: depress
Safety
notes on tires, recommended minimum tire the brake pedal with full force.
tread depths, etc. (Y page 303).
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter pulsing in the brake pedal.
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
described in this section work as effectively as of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
possible. reminder to take extra care while driving.
Off-road ABS
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
General information road program is activated (Y page 171).
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This wheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces
braking. the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument limits steering capability.
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph BAS (Brake Assist System)
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you General information
only brake gently. BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
Important safety notes automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 59).
G WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when tion (Y page 59).
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- G WARNING
ally, further driving safety systems are deac- If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- in an emergency braking situation is
ding and accidents. increased. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- In an emergency braking situation, depress
diately at a qualified specialist workshop. the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 234) and dis-
Braking workshop. This also applies to collisions at low

speeds where no visible damage to the front of
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the vehicle is apparent.
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Activating/deactivating
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Active Brake Assist is active after every ignition
cycle.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Safety
Active Brake Assist Assist (Y page 198) in the on-board computer.
When deactivated, the distance warning func-
General information tion and the autonomous braking function are
also deactivated.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
tion (Y page 59). symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-
Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warn- play.
ing function with an autonomous braking func- If you have activated DSR, Active Brake Assist is
tion and situation-dependent braking assis- deactivated. For further information on DSR,
tance see (Y page 170).
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in Distance warning function
front or reduce the effects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk General information
of collision, you will be warned visually and The distance warning function can help you to
acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
audible collision warning, autonomous braking vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply collision. If the distance warning function
the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adap- detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
tive Brake Assist supports you with situation- be warned visually and acoustically.
dependent braking assistance.
Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 59).
Detection of hazardous situations can be par-
ticularly impaired if: G WARNING
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else The distance warning function does not react:
covering the sensors
Rto people or animals
Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rto oncoming vehicles
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- Rto crossing traffic
ple in parking garages Rwhen cornering
Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
The distance warning function may not give
motorbike
warnings in all critical situations. There is a
Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
risk of an accident.
Ryou are driving a new vehicle or servicing on
the Active Brake Assist system has just been Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
carried out uation and be ready to brake.
Observe the important safety notes in the Always adapt your speed to suit the prevailing
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 127). road and traffic conditions.
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
Z
G WARNING Vehicles without Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:

the autonomous braking function is available in
The distance warning function cannot always the following speed ranges:
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects
situations.
R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
In such cases, the distance warning function objects
may: Vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC: the
Rgive an unnecessary warning autonomous braking function is available in the
following speed ranges:
Safety
Rnot give a warning

R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving
There is a risk of an accident.
objects
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary
uation and do not rely solely on the distance objects
warning function. Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
Function may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-
Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph tion to intervene.
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An Situation-dependent braking assis-
intermittent warning tone will then sound, and tance
the · distance warning lamp will light up in
the instrument cluster. General information
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
tion (Y page 59).
or
X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
With the help of the radar sensor system, Adap-
tive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
so.
the path of your vehicle for an extended period
Due to the nature of the system, particularly of time.
complicated but non-critical driving conditions If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
may also cause the system to display a warning. sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
With the help of the radar sensor system, the brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If
distance warning function can detect obstacles you apply the brakes forcefully, situation-
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- dependent braking assistance adapts to the sit-
ded period of time. uation and automatically increases the brake
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can situation.
also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- Situation-dependent braking assistance pro-
ped or parked vehicles. vides braking assistance in hazardous situations
at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar
Autonomous braking function sensor technology to assess the traffic situa-
tion.
If the driver does not react to the distance warn- Situation-dependent braking assistance is capa-
ing signal in a critical situation, Active Brake ble of reacting to moving objects that have
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous already been detected as such at least once
braking function. over the period of observation, up to vehicle
The autonomous braking function: speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h).
Rgives the driver more time to react to critical Situation-dependent braking assistance can
driving situations also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle
Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or speeds of around 44 mph (70 km/h).
Rreduces the effects of an accident
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. General notes
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal. tion (Y page 59).
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
power transmission between the tires and the
cle. road surface.
Safety
Situation-dependent braking assistance is then If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from
deactivated. the direction desired by the driver, one or more
Important safety notes wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- cle on the desired course within physical limits.
tion for driving safety systems (Y page 59). ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on
G WARNING wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize
the vehicle during braking.
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Rto people or animals ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic tion (Y page 59).
Rwhen cornering ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
risk of an accident. vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
uation and be ready to brake. side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
G WARNING Traction control remains active, even if you
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly deactivate ESP®.
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions. Offroad 4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might: tem)
Rintervene unnecessarily A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road
Rnot intervene terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (Y page 171).
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Important safety notes
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 59).
Due to the nature of the system, complex but G WARNING
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
Active Brake Assist to intervene. If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the ing safety systems are deactivated. This
brake system is still available with full brake increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
boosting effect and BAS.
Z
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a Deactivating/activating ESP® (except

qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes‑AMG vehicles)
Vehicles without 4MATIC: when towing your Important safety notes

vehicle with the front axle raised, it is important i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
that you observe the notes on ESP® tion (Y page 59).
(Y page 298).
You can select between the following states of
If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up ESP®:
continuously, ESP® is deactivated.
Safety
RESP® is activated.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å
RESP® is deactivated.
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction. G WARNING
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 235) and display messages which may If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
be shown in the instrument cluster bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
(Y page 205). of skidding and an accident.
Only use wheels with the recommended tire Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. bed in the following.
Characteristics of ESP® The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting

action for better traction on loose surfaces.
General information It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before ing situations:
beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically Rwhen using snow chains
active. Rin deep snow
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp Ron sand or gravel
flashes in the instrument cluster.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
If ESP® intervenes: described above no longer apply. ESP® will
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum- otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
stances. the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as spin.
necessary when pulling away. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
road and weather conditions. could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
ECO start/stop function Deactivating/activating ESP®
The ECO start/stop function switches the You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops board computer (Y page 198).
moving. The engine starts automatically when ESP® deactivated:
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
remains in its previously selected status. Exam- The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine ment cluster lights up.
was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated ESP® activated:
when the engine is switched on again. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated In the following situations, it may be better to

activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
ESP®
If is deactivated and one or more wheels
ESP®:
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, Rwhen using snow chains
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. Rin deep snow
If you deactivate ESP®: Ron sand or gravel
RESP® Ron specially designated roads when the vehi-

no longer improves driving stability.
cle's own oversteering and understeering
REngine torque is no longer limited and the
Safety
characteristics are desired
drive wheels are able to spin.
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
RTraction control is still activated.
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and expe-
RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor rienced driver.
is it activated if you brake firmly with assis-
tance from ESP®. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
RSTEER CONTROL is no longer active. described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
RESP® still provides support when you brake
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
firmly. spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP® ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an

extended period with ESP® deactivated. You
(Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Important safety notes Deactivating/activating ESP®
tion (Y page 59).
You can select between the following states of
ESP®:
RESP® is activated.
RSPORT handling mode is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents. X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- press button :.
uations described in the following. The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
SPORT handling mode message appears in
G WARNING the multifunction display.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk briefly press button :.
of skidding and an accident. The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
Z
X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until Off-road ESP®

the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster. An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road
The ÷ OFF message appears in the multi- terrain is activated automatically once the off-
function display. road program is activated (Y page 171).
X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. Offroad ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the oversteering or understeering, thus improving
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® traction.
ON message appears in the multifunction dis-
Safety
play. ESP® trailer stabilization

Characteristics of activated SPORT han- General information
dling mode If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®
more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warn- slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting
ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-
only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. bination has stabilized.
When SPORT handling mode is activated: Important safety notes
RESP® only improves driving stability to a limi- G WARNING
ted degree.
RTraction control is still activated. If road and weather conditions are poor,
RThe engine's torque is only restricted to a trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent
limited degree and the drive wheels may start the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-
to spin. ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is
action for better traction on loose surfaces. a risk of an accident.
RESP® still provides support when you brake Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
firmly. ing road and weather conditions.
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa- the brake firmly.
tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds
If you deactivate ESP®: of about 65 km/h.
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®
is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunc-
REngine torque is no longer limited and the tion.
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
RTraction control is still activated.
tion)
RActive Brake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brake firmly with assis- General information
tance from ESP®.
RESP® still provides support when you brake EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
firmly.
while braking.
Protection against theft 67
Important safety notes Protection against theft

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Immobilizer
tion (Y page 59).
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
G WARNING being started without the correct SmartKey.
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
risk of skidding and an accident. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func-
Safety
You should therefore adapt your driving style tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off
to the different handling characteristics. Have and open the driver's door.
the brake system checked at a qualified spe- X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
cialist workshop. When leaving the vehicle, always take the

SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
Please observe the information on warning and can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
indicator lamps (Y page 234) left inside the vehicle.
(Y page 234) as well as on display messages i The immobilizer is always deactivated when
(Y page 207). you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
ADAPTIVE BRAKE tem is not operational. Contact an authorized
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and Mercedes-Benz Center or call
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
the HOLD function (Y page 166) and hill start
assist (Y page 131).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
STEER CONTROL
General information
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in particular
if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle begins to skid
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
Important safety notes Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-
tion (Y page 59).
Key or KEYLESS-GO.
No steering assistance is provided from STEER or
CONTROL, if:
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
RESP® is malfunctioning
Rthe steering is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.
Z
68 Protection against theft
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the

alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
X To switch the alarm off with the Smart-
Key: press the % or & button on the
Safety
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (Y page 128).
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
i If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
sage or data provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service.
Rthe mbrace service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
available.
SmartKey 69
SmartKey ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be

detected, e.g. when starting the engine using
Important safety notes the Start/Stop button.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, SmartKey functions
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Opening and closing

Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
: & To lock the vehicle
RStart the engine.
; F To open the tailgate
There is a risk of an accident and injury. = % To unlock the vehicle
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X To unlock centrally: press the % button.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
leave children or animals unattended in the imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of Rthe vehicle is locked again.
reach of children. Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.
G WARNING X To lock: press the & button.

If you attach heavy or large objects to the The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- Rthe doors
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could Rthe tailgate
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a Rthe fuel filler flap
risk of an accident. The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the three times when locking.
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before When the locator lighting is activated via the
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- control (see the separate operating instruc-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control tions).
function could be affected. You can also set an audible signal to confirm
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
ity of powerful electrical installations. signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 200).
Do not keep the SmartKey:
X To open the tailgate automatically from
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
or another SmartKey. button until the tailgate opens (Y page 84).
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case start function:
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do X To close the tailgate automatically from
not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart- outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-
Z
70 SmartKey
ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
press the F button on the SmartKey face of the door handle.
(Y page 79). X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface :
When the tailgate closes you can then release or ;.
the button.
Make sure that you do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X Convenience closing feature: touch
KEYLESS-GO recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
General notes
Further information on the convenience clos-
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by ing feature (Y page 88).
Opening and closing
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart-

Key in the vehicle.
Locking and unlocking

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey X To unlock the tailgate: pull tailgate han-
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or dle :.
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
between the SmartKey and the corresponding Deactivating and activating
door handle must not be greater than three feet
(one meter). If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a lon-
A check which periodically establishes a radio ger period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-
connection between the vehicle and the Smart- GO. The SmartKey will then use very little power,
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in thereby conserving battery power. For the pur-
the vehicle. This occurs, for example: poses of activation/deactivation, the vehicle
must not be nearby.
Rwhen starting the engine
X To deactivate: press the & button on the
Rwhile driving
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
Rwhen the external door handles are touched
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
Rduring convenience closing flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then
KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 72).
X To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
are available again.
SmartKey 71
KEYLESS-GO start function Mechanical key

General notes General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
Key in the vehicle. use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-
Changing the settings of the locking theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 67).
system There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
You can change the settings of the locking sys- X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press
Opening and closing

tem. This means that only the driver's door and the % or & button on the key.
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle or
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
on your own. or
X To change the setting: press and hold the X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO:
% and & buttons simultaneously for press the Start/Stop button in the ignition
approximately six seconds until the battery lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
indicator lamp flashes twice (Y page 72). or
If the setting of the locking system is changed X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing GO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehi-
the & or % button: cle.
Rlocks or If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
Runlocks the vehicle key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
The SmartKey now functions as follows: matically.
X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
X To unlock centrally: press the % button
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button. Removing the mechanical key
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: press and
hold the % and & buttons simultane-
ously for approximately six seconds until the
battery check lamp flashes twice
(Y page 72).
Z
72 SmartKey
X Push release catch : in the direction of the Checking the battery

arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
ical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 76)
RUnlocking the cargo compartment
(Y page 82)
RLocking the vehicle (Y page 77)
Inserting the mechanical key

Opening and closing
X Push mechanical key ; completely into the

SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position. X Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
SmartKey battery The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
Important safety notes X Change the battery (Y page 72).
G WARNING i If the SmartKey battery is checked within

the signal reception range of the vehicle,
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- pressing the & or % button:
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in Rlocks or
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal Runlocks the vehicle
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Replacing the battery
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guide- X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal- (Y page 71).
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in

the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
until battery tray cover : opens. When doing
so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.
SmartKey 73
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is

free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover :
and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
Opening and closing

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
the SmartKey. try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control func-
tion of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 72).
X Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function:
try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control func-
tion of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
74 SmartKey

You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 72).
mechanical key.
Opening and closing
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
mechanical key.
X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 293).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked.

started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 72).
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors 75

You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors Unlocking and opening doors from
Opening and closing

the inside
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
Rrelease
X To unlock and open a front door: pull door
the parking brake.
handle ;.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
park position P The door is unlocked and opens.
RStart the engine. X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
leave children or animals unattended in the
even if it has been locked. You can only open the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
reach of children. secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 59).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
You should preferably place luggage or loads in the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
guidelines (Y page 251). system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 67).
Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock
the vehicle before pulling away, for example.
Z
76 Doors
Automatic locking feature

Opening and closing
X To unlock: press button :.

X To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors and the tailgate are closed, the X To deactivate: press and hold button : for
vehicle locks. approximately five seconds until a tone
sounds.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked X To activate: press and hold button ; for
or unlocked. approximately five seconds until a tone
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the sounds.
inside if the vehicle has been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
You can open a door from inside the vehicle been selected.
even if it has been locked. You can open the rear
doors from inside the vehicle unless they are The vehicle is locked automatically when the
secured by the child-proof lock (Y page 59). ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing.
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door You could therefore lock yourself out if:
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm Rthe vehicle is being pushed
system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 67). Rthe vehicle is being towed
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
You can also switch the automatic locking func-
taken into consideration if:
tion on and off using the on-board computer
Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but- (Y page 200).
ton for the central locking, or
Rif the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ- Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's ical key)
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked. unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 67).
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(Y page 71).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
driver's door as far as it will go.
Cargo compartment 77
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it

will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are
locked.
(Y page 72).
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft
alarm system is not armed.
Opening and closing

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1. Cargo compartment
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. Important safety notes
(Y page 72). G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the during the closing process. There is a risk of
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
key. injury.
X Open the driver's door. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
closing area during the closing process.
doors and the tailgate. Use one of the following options to stop the
X Press the locking button on the driver’s door closing process:
(Y page 75). Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
Rpull or press the remote operating switch
front-passenger door and the rear doors are
still visible. Press down the locking knobs by on the driver's door.
hand, if necessary. Rpress the close button or STOP button on
X Close the driver's door. the tailgate.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
(Y page 71).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
G WARNING
driver's door as far as it will go.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particu-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Z
78 Cargo compartment
G WARNING detection with reversing feature is only an aid. It

is not a substitute for your attentiveness when
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or opening and closing the tailgate.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle G WARNING
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- The reversing feature does not respond:
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
den change in direction.
Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
Always store objects so that they cannot be movement
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
loads against slipping or tipping before the
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
Opening and closing
journey.
tions in particular. There is a risk of injury.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear Make sure that no body parts are in close
when opened. Therefore, make sure that proximity during the closing procedure.
there is sufficient clearance above and behind If somebody becomes trapped:
the tailgate.
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section Rpull or press the remote operating switch
(Y page 335). on the driver's door or
You should preferably place luggage or loads in Rpress the closing button/STOP button in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading the tailgate or
guidelines (Y page 251).
Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-
partment. You could otherwise lock yourself
out. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also
possible to stop the closing process by perform-
The tailgate can be: ing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Rvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: open/
close automatically from the outside Opening and closing manually
Rvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: open/
close automatically from the inside Opening
Rvehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and
with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start
function: closed with the remote operating
switch on the SmartKey
Rreleased with the emergency release from the
inside
Tailgate obstruction detection with

reversing feature
On vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate, the
tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto- X Pull handle :.
matically opening or closing, this procedure is X Raise the tailgate.
stopped. If the tailgate is stopped during the
closing process, the tailgate automatically
opens again slightly. The automatic obstruction
Closing could enter the passenger compartment.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear

when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
Opening and closing

found in the "Vehicle data" section
X Pull the tailgate down using handle :. (Y page 335).
X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & Opening automatically
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
You can open the tailgate automatically with the
SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
Opening/closing automatically from X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
outside Key until the tailgate opens.
or
Important safety notes X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle and
let it go again immediately.
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur- Closing automatically
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: you can
also close the tailgate automatically from out-
the closing area or may enter the closing area
side.
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
on the driver's door.
Rpress the close button or STOP button on
the tailgate.
X To close: press button : on the tailgate.
Rpull the handle on the tailgate.
or
X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and
G WARNING KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func-
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust tion: if the SmartKey is located in the imme-
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate diate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F
is open when the engine is running, particu- button on the SmartKey.
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes You can release the button as soon as the
tailgate starts to close.
Z
X To stop the closing process: press but- ground and that there is sufficient clearance
ton : on the tailgate again. to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
or lose your balance, for example on ice.
X Pull the handle in the tailgate.
or
X Press the F button on the SmartKey until
the tailgate stops.
or
X Press or pull the remote operating switch on
the driver's door.
Opening and closing
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Important safety notes RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking
movement within the detection range of sen-
G WARNING sors :.
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
You could burn yourself by touching the rear area while doing so.
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE RDo not come into contact with the bumper
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always while making the kicking movement. Other-
ensure that you only make the kicking move- wise, the sensors may not function correctly.
ment within the detection range of sensors. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function dur-
ing engine start.
! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection RDirt caused by road salt around sensors :
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- may restrict functionality.
tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-
tional opening of the tailgate: thetic leg may restrict functionality.
Rusing a car wash RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec-
Rusing a power washer tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE
ACCESS could be triggered. The tailgate
Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
could thus be opened or closed unintention-
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
ally, for example, if you:
i You can also deactivate KEYLESS-GO. Fur- - set something down or lift something up
ther information on deactivating and activat- behind the vehicle.
ing KEYLESS-GO (Y page 70). - polish the rear of the vehicle.
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your
General notes person in these situations or in situations sim-
ilar to these. This will prevent the uninten-
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, tional opening/closing of the tailgate.
you can open or close the tailgate or stop the
procedure without using your hands. This is use-
ful if you have your hands full. To do this, make
a kicking movement under the bumper with your
foot.
Observe the following points:
RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear
detection range of the vehicle.
RWhen making the kicking movement, make
sure that you are standing firmly on the
Operation the closing area or may enter the closing area

during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
on the driver's door.
Opening and closing

Rpress the closing or locking button on the
X To open/close: kick into sensor detection tailgate.
range : under the bumper with your foot. Rpull the handle on the tailgate
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
opening or closing.
G WARNING
X If the tailgate does not open/close after Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
several attempts: wait at least ten seconds,
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
using your foot kick under the bumper again.
is open when the engine is running, particu-
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
long, the tailgate does not open or close. Repeat
the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. could enter the passenger compartment.
To stop the opening or closing procedure:
Rkick with your leg in the sensor detection
range : under the bumper or
Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate,
or when opened. Therefore, make sure that
Rpress the closing button on the tailgate, or there is sufficient clearance above and behind
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey the tailgate.
If the tailgate closing procedure has been stop- Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is
ped: opening or closing.
RKick your foot under the bumper again and The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
the tailgate will open. found in the "Vehicle data" section
If the tailgate opening procedure has been stop- (Y page 335).
ped:
RKick your foot under the bumper again and Opening and closing automatically
the tailgate will close. You can open the tailgate from the driver's seat
when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
It is only possible to close the tailgate from the
Opening/closing automatically from driver's seat on vehicles with the EASY-PACK
inside tailgate.
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
Z
Rpress the closing button in the tailgate, or

Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate
again, or
Rpress the tailgate button on the key.
X To store the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until two short
tones sound.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Opening and closing
X To open: pull remote operating switch for the Deactivating

tailgate : until the tailgate opens. X Press and hold the closing button in the tail-
X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or gate until you hear a short tone.
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128).
X Press and hold the remote operating switch
for tailgate : until the tailgate is completely Emergency release
closed.
General notes
Limiting the opening angle of the tail- ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
gate there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
General notes
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to found in the "Vehicle data" section
open the tailgate fully when setting the open- (Y page 335).
ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out-
Rusing the SmartKey, or
side.
Rusing the remote operating switch in the door
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. control panel:
This could be useful, for example, if there is
insufficient space above the tailgate. It is pos- Use the emergency release on the inside of the
sible to limit the tailgate in the top half of its tailgate.
opening range. You can reach the emergency release via the
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the cargo compartment.
outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
automatically. This does not delete the stored Opening
position.
Activating
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the
tailgate.
X To stop the opening process at the
desired position:
Trunk 83
X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards The trunk lid can be:
(Y page 255). Ropened and closed manually from outside
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
Ropened automatically from outside
(Y page 71).
Ropened automatically from inside
X Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in
Rreleased with the emergency release from the
the trim and push it in.
inside
X Open the tailgate.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72).
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
Opening and closing

Trunk
G WARNING
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
open. X Pull handle :.
X Raise the tailgate.
G WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or Closing
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient X Pull the tailgate down using handle :.
clearance above the trunk lid.
X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &
found in the "Vehicle data" section button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
(Y page 335).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(Y page 251).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Z
84 Trunk
Opening automatically from outside ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection
range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-
Important safety notes tions, for example, could lead to the uninten-
tional opening of the tailgate:
G WARNING Rusing a car wash
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Rusing a power washer
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the (3 m) away from the vehicle.
i You can also deactivate KEYLESS-GO. Fur-
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a ther information on deactivating and activat-
risk of poisoning. ing KEYLESS-GO (Y page 70).
Opening and closing

the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid General notes
open.
With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS,
you can open or close the tailgate or stop the
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. procedure without using your hands. This is use-
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient ful if you have your hands full. To do this, make
clearance above the trunk lid. a kicking movement under the bumper with your
i The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can foot.
be found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 335). Observe the following points:
RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per-
Opening automatically son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear
detection range of the vehicle.
You can open the trunk lid automatically using
RWhen making the kicking movement, make
the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.
sure that you are standing firmly on the
X Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
ground and that there is sufficient clearance
Key until the trunk lid opens. to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise
or lose your balance, for example on ice.
X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid
handle and let it go again immediately.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS
G WARNING
The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot.
You could burn yourself by touching the
exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE
RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking
ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always
movement within the detection range of sen-
ensure that you only make the kicking move-
sors :.
ment within the detection range of sensors.
RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
rear area while doing so.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. Other-
wise, the sensors may not function correctly.
Trunk 85
RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function dur- If the tailgate closing procedure has been stop-
ing engine start. ped:
RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : RKick your foot under the bumper again and
may restrict functionality. the tailgate will open.
Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros- If the tailgate opening procedure has been stop-
thetic leg may restrict functionality. ped:
RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec- RKick your foot under the bumper again and
tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE the tailgate will close.
ACCESS could be triggered. The tailgate
could thus be opened or closed unintention-
ally, for example, if you:
- set something down or lift something up
Opening automatically from inside
Opening and closing

behind the vehicle. Important safety notes
- polish the rear of the vehicle.
Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your G WARNING
person in these situations or in situations sim- Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
ilar to these. This will prevent the uninten- gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
tional opening/closing of the tailgate.
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
Operation
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found under "Vehicle data" (Y page 335).
X To open/close: kick into sensor detection Opening

range : under the bumper with your foot.
Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat
opening or closing. when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
X If the tailgate does not open/close after
several attempts: wait at least ten seconds,
using your foot kick under the bumper again.
If you hold your foot under the bumper for too
long, the tailgate does not open or close. Repeat
the leg movement more quickly if this occurs.
To stop the opening or closing procedure:
Rkick with your leg in the sensor detection
range : under the bumper or
Rpull the handle on the outside of the tailgate,
or
Rpress the closing button on the tailgate, or
X To open: pull remote operating switch : for
the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens.
Rpress the F button on the SmartKey
Z
86 Side windows
Emergency release for the trunk

General notes
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 335).
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
Opening and closing
Rusing the SmartKey, or

X Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
Rusing the remote operating switch in the door
control panel: The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
Use the emergency release on the inside of the the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-
tailgate. cle is stationary or while driving.
You can reach the emergency release via the The trunk lid emergency release does not open
cargo compartment. the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or
discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
Opening
REmergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
REmergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
Side windows
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
(Y page 255). dow and the door frame as the side window
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey moves. There is a risk of injury.
(Y page 71). Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
X Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in dow during the opening procedure. If some-
the trim and push it in. body becomes trapped, release the switch or
X Open the tailgate. pull the switch to close the side window again.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey
(Y page 72). G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
Emergency release button is a risk of injury.
You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi- When closing make sure that no parts of the
cle with the emergency release button. body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
Side windows 87
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Opening and closing

: Front left
Side window reversing feature ; Front right
= Rear right
The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks ? Rear left
or restricts a side window from traveling X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
upwards during the automatic closing process, ignition lock (Y page 128).
the side window opens again automatically. Dur- X To open manually: press and hold the cor-
ing the manual closing process, the side window responding switch.
only opens again automatically after the corre- X To open fully: press the switch beyond the
sponding switch is released. The automatic
pressure point and release it.
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-
Automatic operation is started.
tute for your attention when closing a side win-
dow. X To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
G WARNING X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
The reversing feature does not react: pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
X To interrupt automatic operation: press/
gers
pull the corresponding switch again.
Rwhile resetting i If you press/pull the switch beyond the
This means that the reversing feature cannot point of resistance, automatic operation is
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- started in the corresponding direction. You
uations. There is a risk of injury. can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If i You can continue to operate the side win-
someone becomes trapped, press the switch dows after you switch off the engine or
to open the side window again. remove the SmartKey. This function remains
active for five minutes or until the driver's or
front-passenger door is opened.
Opening and closing the side win- i When the override feature for the side win-
dows is activated (Y page 59), the side win-
dows dows cannot be operated from the rear.
The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
door for the corresponding side window. Convenience opening
The switches on the driver's door take prece- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESS-
dence. GO start function, Exclusive package or
AMG Exclusive package: you can ventilate the
vehicle before you start driving.
Z
88 Side windows
The SmartKey can also be used to carry out the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESS-
following functions simultaneously: GO start function, Exclusive Package or
Runlock the vehicle AMG Exclusive Package: at the same time you
can:
Ropen the side windows
Rlock the vehicle
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel and the roller sunblind Rclose the side windows
The convenience opening feature can only be Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
operated using the SmartKey. ing panel
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail- On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
able when the vehicle is unlocked. tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
X Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
sunblind.
Opening and closing
Exclusive package but without KEYLESS- i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
GO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for for:
the following operations, point the tip of the Rthe side window (Y page 87)
SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's
door. The SmartKey must be close to the driv- Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
er's door handle. panel (Y page 91)
Rthe roller sunblind (Y page 92)
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO start function: the SmartKey must
be in close proximity to the vehicle. Using the SmartKey
X Press and hold the % button until the side X Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
windows and the panorama sunroof are in the Exclusive package but without KEYLESS-
desired position. GO and the KEYLESS-GO start function: for
If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof the following operations, point the tip of the
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's
roller sunblind is opened first. door. The SmartKey must be close to the driv-
X Press and hold the % button once more er's door handle.
until the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
ing panel reaches the desired position. LESS-GO start function: the SmartKey must
X To interrupt convenience opening: release be in close proximity to the vehicle.
the % button.
X Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
Convenience closing feature X Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Important safety notes are closed.
G WARNING On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped X Press and hold the & button again until the
in the closing area of the side window and the roller sunblind of the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel closes.
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure. Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
Side windows 89
the SmartKey and the corresponding door han- the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). panel closes.
X To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.
Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
Opening and closing

X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 128).
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
door handle until the side windows and the
control panel until the side window is com-
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
pletely closed (Y page 87).
are fully closed.
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :. If the side window opens again slightly:
X Make sure that all the side windows are X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
closed. the door control panel until the side window is
X Make sure that all the side windows and the completely closed (Y page 87).
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel X Hold the switch for an additional second.
are closed. X If the respective side window remains closed
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power after the button is released, then it has been
tilt/sliding panel: set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above.
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblind of
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Z
90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

A side window cannot be X Remove the objects.
closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
closed and you cannot slightly:
see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
Opening and closing
The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding When leaving the vehicle, always take the
panel SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
In the following section, the term "sliding sun- G WARNING
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-
tilt/sliding panel.
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could
G WARNING trap you or other persons. There is a risk of
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
body parts in close proximity could become the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
trapped. There is a risk of injury. vehicle is in motion.
Make sure that no body parts are in close If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
proximity during the opening and closing pro- pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-
cedures. ing sunroof lifts during opening.
If somebody becomes trapped:
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
Rrelease the switch immediately, or snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
Rduring automatic operation, push the
occur.
switch briefly in any direction Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
The opening or closing procedure will be stop- damaged.
ped.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
G WARNING ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
If children operate the sliding sunroof they cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
could become trapped, particularly if they are water enters the vehicle interior.
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. i Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the usual airflow noises when the sliding sun-
roof is open. They are caused by minor pres-
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 91
sure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Operating the panorama roof with
Change the position of the sliding sunroof or power tilt/sliding panel
open a side window slightly to reduce or elim-
inate these noises. Opening and closing
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
Opening and closing

matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-
matically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when clos- : To raise
ing the sliding sunroof. ; To open
G WARNING = To close/lower
The reversing feature does not react: The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can only be operated when the roller sunblind is
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- open.
gers X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing ignition lock (Y page 128).
movement X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
Rduring resetting sponding direction.
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again man- If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
ually immediately after automatic reversing point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
This means that the reversing feature cannot automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
prevent someone being trapped in these sit- switch again.
uations. There is a risk of injury. After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sun-
Make sure that no body parts are in close blind closes slightly automatically. This reduces
proximity during the closing procedure. drafts in the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it low-
If somebody becomes trapped: ers slightly automatically at higher speeds. The
Rrelease the switch immediately, or noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a
Rpress the switch in any direction during the
result.
automatic closing process At low speeds it raises again automatically.
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic
The closing process is stopped. lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The
sliding sunroof raises again automatically.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function
remains active for five minutes or until you open
a front door.
The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if a roof
carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation
of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding
sunroof.
Z
If contact is made with a roof carrier approved If somebody becomes trapped:

by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers
slightly but remains raised at the rear. Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
Rain-closing feature switch briefly in any direction
The rain-closing feature is only available for vehi- The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
cles with a rain sensor. ped.
When the SmartKey is in position g in the igni-
tion lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof The roller sunblind shields the vehicle interior
closes automatically: from sunlight. The roller sunblind can only be
opened and closed when the panorama roof
Rif it starts to rain. with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Opening and closing
Rat extreme outside temperatures.

Rafter six hours. Roller sunblind reversing feature
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply.
The roller sunblind is equipped with an auto-
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
remains raised at the rear in order to allow ven- or restricts the roller sunblind during the closing
tilation of the vehicle interior. process, the roller sunblind opens again auto-
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding matically. The automatic reversing feature is
panel is obstructed while being closed by the only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten-
rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The tiveness when closing the roller sunblind.
rain-closing feature is then deactivated.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel G WARNING
does not close if: The reversing feature does not react:
Rit is raised at the rear. Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
Rit is blocked. gers
Rno rain is falling on the area of the windshield
Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again man-
being monitored by the rain sensor. If the
vehicle, for example, is under a bridge or in a ually immediately after automatic reversal
carport, the field of the sensor may be cov- This means that the reversing feature cannot
ered. prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
Operating the roller sunblind for the that no body parts are in the sweep area.
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
If somebody becomes trapped:
panel
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Important safety notes Rpress the switch in any direction during the
G WARNING automatic closing process

Parts of the body could become trapped The closing process is stopped.
between the roller sunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
ing. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun-
blind.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 93
Opening and closing Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel or the roller sunblind if the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sun-
blind does not move smoothly.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
Opening and closing

X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
: To open resistance in the direction of arrow : until
; To open the roller sunblind is fully closed.
= To close X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X Make sure that the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind can
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre- be fully opened and closed again.
sponding direction.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
After opening the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automati-
cally closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the
vehicle interior.
Resetting the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblind
Z
Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

G WARNING
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the
backing up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or
maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Always reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunction or voltage supply interruption.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
Opening and closing
qualified specialist workshop.

The panorama roof with If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during
power tilt/sliding panel closing and reopens again slightly:
cannot be closed and X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
you cannot see the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
cause. panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more
force.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again
during closing and reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without
the automatic reversing feature.
Seats 95
Correct driver's seat position Ryou should have a good overview of traffic
conditions
Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
G WARNING and is routed across the center of your shoul-
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do der and across your hips in the pelvic area
the following while driving: Further related subjects:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, RAdjusting the seats manually (Y page 96)
steering wheel or mirrors RAdjusting the seats electrically
Rfasten the seat belt (Y page 97)
RAdjusting the steering wheel manually
There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 100)
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- RFastening the seat belt correctly
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt (Y page 43)
before starting the engine. RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

mirrors (Y page 101)
RVehicles with a memory function: saving
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings using the memory function
(Y page 104)
Seats
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as SmartKey in the ignition lock.
possible
Ryou
G WARNING
are sitting in a normal upright position
Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
cushion occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
can depress the pedals properly Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
by the center of the head restraint
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
arms slightly bent (Y page 44) and "Children in the vehicle"
Ryou can move your legs freely (Y page 53).
Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument G WARNING
cluster clearly
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in
Z
96 Seats
motion. This could cause you to lose control of ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
Always make sure that the driver's seat is seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
engaged before starting the vehicle.
i Further related subjects:
G WARNING Rcargo compartment enlargement (folding
down the rear seats) (Y page 254)
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, Adjusting the seats manually
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
Vehicles without the seating comfort
package
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-

ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
While moving the seats, make sure that your X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
hands or other body parts do not get under the backwards.
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- X Release lever : again.
tem. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information: Backrest angle:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.
soon as possible. Seat height:
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
X Pull handle ; upwards or push it down
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
ing should also not be used to dry the seats. repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place sharp objects on the seat
cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
seats should only be occupied by passen-
gers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materi-
als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
child seats or booster seats.
Seats 97
Vehicles with the seating comfort pack- Adjusting the seats electrically
age
: Seat height

; Seat cushion angle
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
X Lift handle : and slide the seat forwards or
? Backrest angle
rearwards.
X Release lever : again. i You can store the seat settings using the
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in memory function (Y page 104).
position.
Backrest angle:
Adjusting the head restraints
X Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X Turn handwheel A forwards or backwards. Important safety notes
Seat height: G WARNING
X Pull handle ? upwards or push it down You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
repeatedly until the seat has reached the the following while driving:
desired height.
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
Seat cushion angle:
X Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
supported.
X Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards. There is a risk of an accident.
Seat cushion length: Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
X Lift handle ; and slide the front part of the
before starting the engine.
seat cushion forwards or backwards.
X Release lever ; again.
The seat cushion engages. G WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Z
98 Seats
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the With this function you can adjust the distance
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to between the head restraint and the back of the
your head. seat occupant's head.
X To move forwards: pull the head restraint
General notes forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust There are several notches.
the front head restraints or the outer rear head
X To move backwards: press and hold release
restraints.
button : and push the head restraint back-
wards.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
X When the head restraint is in the desired posi-
Adjusting the head restraint height tion, release the button and make sure that
the head restraint is engaged in position.
Rear seat head restraints

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the

desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
head restraint desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
Seats 99
Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to high temperatures may be
affected or they may even suffer burn-like
: Raises the backrest contour injuries. There is a risk of injury.
; Softens the backrest contour Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
= Lowers the backrest contour repeatedly.

? Hardens the backrest contour
AMG Performance Seat

Vehicles with electrically adjustable seats:
to adjust the contour of the seat and for
improved lateral support, you can individually
adjust the front seats.
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-

cate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush-
ion The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat cush-
ion narrower: press button :. ignition lock (Y page 128).
X To set the side bolsters of the seat cush-
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
ion wider: press button ;. until the desired heating level is set.
Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat back- X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
rest until all the indicator lamps go out.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest narrower: press button =. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
X To set the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest wider: press button ?.
Z
100 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
switched off prematurely ers are switched on.
or cannot be switched X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
on. rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch
back on automatically.
Steering wheel
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
There is a risk of an accident. : Release lever
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ; Adjusts the steering wheel height
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-
before starting the engine. and-aft adjustment)
X Push release lever : down completely.
G WARNING The steering column is unlocked.
Children could injure themselves if they X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of tion.
injury. X Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. When
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
direction.
Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
Mirrors 101
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror

X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:

press button ;.
X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-
wards or back. Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but-
ton :.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
ton lights up in red.
Exterior mirrors The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
Adjusting the exterior mirrors mirror using button = as long as the indicator
lamp is lit.
G WARNING X Press button = up, down, or to the right or
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror
the following while driving: to the correct position. You should have a
good overview of traffic conditions.
steering wheel or mirrors The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
There is a risk of an accident. mirrors are automatically heated at low outside
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt minutes.
before starting the engine. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
G WARNING defroster.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
objects are actually closer than they appear. electrically
This means that you could misjudge the dis- This function is only available in Canada.
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Z
102 Mirrors
Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors (Canada only): press and hold mir-
ror-folding button (Y page 101) until you hear
a click and the mirror engages audibly into
position.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the The mirror housing is engaged again and you
ignition lock (Y page 128). can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
X Briefly press :. (Y page 101).
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are Automatic anti-glare mirrors
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate. G WARNING
i If you are driving faster than 30 mph Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte- matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
rior mirrors. is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
Resetting the exterior mirrors piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
This function is only available in Canada. There is a risk of injury.
If the battery has been disconnected or com- If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be observe the following:
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin
locking" function in the on-board computer immediately with water.
(Y page 201). RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
tion lock (Y page 128). RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
X Briefly press :.
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your
automatically skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
This function is only available in Canada. attention immediately.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is RImmediately change out of clothing which
activated in the on-board computer has come into contact with electrolyte.
(Y page 201):
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
attention immediately.
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati- The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and only available if the vehicle is equipped with the
then open the driver's or front-passenger "Mirrors package".
door.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Memory function 103
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on Calling up a stored parking position set-
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare ting
mode if:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 128).
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
X Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mir-
sor in the rear-view mirror
ror using the corresponding button
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if (Y page 101).
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting X Engage reverse gear.
is switched on.
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
Parking position for the exterior mir- moves back to its original position:
ror on the front-passenger side
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)

Setting and storing the parking position
Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged
You can set the front-passenger side exterior reverse gear
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on Rwhen you use button : to select the exterior
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. mirror on the driver's side
You can store this position.
Memory function
G WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror side when the vehicle is stationary.
; Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror G WARNING
= Button for the exterior mirror setting
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
? Memory button M
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. children – could become trapped. There is a
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjust-
X Press button ;.
ments, make sure that no one has any body
X Engage reverse gear.
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
side moves to the default parking position. becomes trapped, immediately release the
X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to
memory function position button. The adjust-
a position that allows you to see the rear ment process is stopped.
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored. G WARNING
i If you shift the transmission to another posi- Children could become trapped if they acti-
tion, the front-passenger side exterior mirror vate the memory function, particularly when
returns to the driving position. unattended. There is a risk of injury.
Z
104 Memory function

The memory function can be used at any time,

e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
tion lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rseat and backrest position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X Adjust the seat (Y page 97).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side
(Y page 101).
X Briefly press the M memory button and then
press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting

X Press and hold the relevant preset position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior
mirrors are in the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
as you release the storage position button.
Exterior lighting 105
Exterior lighting The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-

ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:
General notes Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in
mends that you drive with the lights switched on position g
even during the daytime. In some countries,
operation of the headlamps varies due to legal Automatic headlamp mode
requirements and self-imposed obligations. Ã is the preferred light switch position:
RThe light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
Setting the exterior lighting light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
conditions such as fog, snow or spray).
Setting options RWith the SmartKey in position 1 in the igni-
Exterior lighting can be set using the: tion lock: the parking lamps are switched on
or off automatically depending on the bright-
Rlight switch ness of the ambient light.
Rcombination switch (Y page 107) RWith the engine running: if you have activated
Lights and windshield wipers

Ron-board computer (Y page 200) the Daytime Running Lights function via
the on-board computer, the daytime running
Light switch lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam
headlamps are switched on or off automati-
Operation cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-
ent light.
X To switch on the automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to the Ã posi-
tion.
G WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
1 W Left-hand standing lamps
In such situations, turn the light switch to
2 X Right-hand standing lamps
L.
3 T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
by the light sensor ing at all times.
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps Canada only:
B R Rear fog lamp The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
C N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-
lamps) ning lamps function is required by law in Can-
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you shift the automatic transmis-
X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
sion from a driving position to position j the
daytime running lamps or low-beam headlamps
go out after 3 minutes.
Z
106 Exterior lighting
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta- Rear fog lamp
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
light switch to the T position, the daytime vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
running lamps and parking lamps turn on. fog. Please take note of the country-specific
If the engine is running and you turn the light regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
switch to the L position, the manual settings X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
take precedence over the daytime running
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
lamps.
start the engine.
USA only:
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
X Press the R button.
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the
daytime running lamps function must be The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
switched on using the on-board computer ment cluster lights up.
(Y page 200). X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
If the engine is running and you turn the light R button.

switch to the T or L position, the manual The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
settings take precedence over the daytime run- ment cluster goes out.
ning lamps.
Parking lamps
Low-beam headlamps ! If the battery charge is very low, the parking
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is lamps or standing lamps are automatically
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- switched off to enable the next engine start.
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on Always park your vehicle safely and in a well lit
and the light switch is set to the L position. area, in accordance with the relevant legal
This is a particularly useful function in the event stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
of rain and fog. lamps over a period of several hours. If pos-
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- hand W standing lamps.
tion lock or start the engine. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
X Turn the light switch to L. The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Front fog lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
In conditions where visibility is poor due to fog, corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
snow or rain, the fog lamps improve visibility as X To switch on the standing lamps: the
well as making it easier for other road users to SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
see you. They can be operated together with the position g in the ignition lock.
parking lamps or together with the parking X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
lamps and low-beam headlamps. the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
X To switch on the fog lamps: turn the Smart- vehicle).
Key to position 2 in the ignition lock or start
the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X To switch off the fog lamps: press the N
button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
Exterior lighting 107
Combination switch Hazard warning lamps
X To indicate briefly: press the combination X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
switch briefly to the pressure point in the press button :.
direction of arrow ; or ?. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
The corresponding turn signal flashes three turn signal using the combination switch, only

times. the turn signal lamp on the corresponding
X To indicate: press the combination switch side of the vehicle will flash.
beyond the pressure point in the direction of X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
arrow ; or ?. press button :.
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: The hazard warning lamps automatically switch
turn the light switch to L or Ã. on if:
X Press the combination switch beyond the Ran air bag is deployed or
pressure point in the direction of arrow :. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
The high-beam headlamps only switch on in
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
the Ã position if the low-beam headlamps
standstill
are on.
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-
headlamps are switched on.
cation.
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
move the combination switch back to its nor-
ignition is switched off.
mal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
X To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull Cornering light function
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow =.
The cornering light function improves the illu-

mination of the road over a wide angle in the
Z
108 Interior lighting
direction you are turning, enabling better visi- Rear compartment control panel
bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after no
more than three minutes. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel
: p Switches the reading lamp on or off
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may

cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
Vehicles without a panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
; p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
Interior lighting control

General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
: p Switches the left-hand front reading discharging, the interior lighting functions are
lamp on or off automatically deactivated after some time
; c Switches the front interior lighting on except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in
= v Switches the rear interior lighting on or the ignition lock.
off The color and brightness for the ambient lighting
? | Switches the front interior lighting/ may be set via the multimedia system; see the
automatic interior lighting control off separate operating instructions.
A p Switches the right-hand front reading
lamp on or off
B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
trol on
Replacing bulbs 109
Automatic interior lighting control Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 109).
Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself
X To switch on: set the switch to center posi- replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
tion B. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-
X To switch off: set the switch to the | sult a qualified specialist workshop.
position. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a
The interior lighting automatically switches on if qualified specialist workshop.
you: Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
Runlock the vehicle vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
Ropen a door
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and
The interior light is activated for a short while rear lamp clusters of your vehicle are equipped
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs your-
lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via self. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
the multimedia system; see the separate oper- which has the necessary specialist knowledge
ating instructions. and tools to carry out the work required.

Replacing bulbs Overview of bulb types
Important safety notes You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its

glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
Ryou touch it Vehicles with halogen headlamps
Rit is hot : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
Ryou drop it ; High-beam headlamps/daytime running
Ryou scratch it lamps/parking lamps/standing lamps:
H15 55 W/15 W
Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been
designed for this purpose. Only install spare = Low-beam headlamps: H15 55 W
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life
of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with a lint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with
liquids.
Z
110 Replacing bulbs
Low-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)
Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps)

: Backup lamp: W 16 W
; Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
= Brake lamp: W 16 W X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 110).
? Rear fog lamp: H 21 W
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
Replacing front bulbs pull out.
Removing and installing the cover in the X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
front wheel housing X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing
(Y page 110).
High-beam headlamps/daytime run-

ning lamps/parking lamps and stand-
ing lamps (halogen headlamps)
You must remove the cover of the front wheel

housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X To remove: switch off the lights.
X Turn the front wheels inwards.
X Slide cover : up and remove it.
X To install: insert cover : again and slide it
down until it engages.
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
Replacing bulbs 111
X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop. X To open: turn release knob : counter-clock-
X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the wise and remove side trim panel ;.
right. X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : clockwise.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
Right-hand side trim panel

X Switch off the lights. You must open the side trim panel in the cargo
X Open the hood.
compartment before you can replace the bulbs
in the tail lamps.
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
X To open: release right-hand trim panel : at
pull out.
X Turn the bulb counter-clockwise and pull it
the top and fold it down in the direction of the
arrow.
out of bulb holder :.
X To close: replace side paneling :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages. Tail lamps
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
backup lamp (vehicles with halogen headlamps)
Replacing rear bulbs and rear fog lamp in the tailgate changed at a
Opening and closing the side trim pan- X Switch off the lights.
els X Open the cargo compartment.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 111).
Left-hand side trim panel

You must open the side trim panel in the cargo X Release and remove connector ;.
compartment before you can replace the bulbs
in the tail lamps.
X Hold the tail lamp and unscrew fender nut :.
X Remove the tail lamp.
Z
112 Windshield wipers
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry, as this could damage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
Tail lamps wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
X Loosen screws = using a screwdriver. wipers.
X Remove the bulb holder from the tail lamp.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the

windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
Bulb holder
? Turn signals
A Brake lamp
X Turn signal: press the bulb gently into the
bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder. Combination switch
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and 1 $ Windshield wiper off
turn it clockwise. 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
X Brake lamp: remove the corresponding bulb to low sensitivity)
from the bulb holder. 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. set to high sensitivity)
X Insert the bulb holder into the tail lamp and
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
screw it firmly into place using screws =. 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
X Insert the tail lamp into the vehicle. B í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
shield using washer fluid
X Tighten fender nut : and re-establish con-
tact with connector ;. X Switch on the ignition.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 111). X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield
becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the
windshield wipers may be activated inadver-
tently. This could then damage the windshield
wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
Windshield wipers 113
For this reason, you should always switch off Replacing the wiper blades
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å Important safety notes
position, the appropriate wiping frequency is
automatically set according to the intensity of G WARNING
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is If the windshield wipers begin to move while
more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus- you are changing the wiper blades, you could
ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre- be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
quently.
injury.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent Always switch off the windshield wipers and
you from observing the traffic conditions. ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make

Switching the rear window wiper on/ sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
off
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm

has been folded away from the windshield/
rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls
onto the windshield/rear window, the wind-
shield/rear window may be damaged by the
force of the impact.
Combination switch Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
: è Switch
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
2 ô Wipes with washer fluid
3 I Switches on intermittent wiping
Changing the windshield wiper blades
4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping
5 ô Wipes with washer fluid Removing the wiper blades
X Switch on the ignition. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
X Slide switch : on the combination switch to LESS-GO start function: remove the Smart-
the corresponding position. Key from the ignition lock.
When the rear window wiper is switched on, X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
the è symbol appears in the assistance GO start function: switch off the engine.
graphic in the instrument cluster. Further X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
information on the assistance graphic
(Y page 198).
Z
114 Windshield wipers
X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction until it engages in the locking position with a
of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as noticeable click.
it will go. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = rectly.
until it engages in the removal position with a X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
noticeable click.
X Remove protective film : of the service indi-

X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of cator on the tip of the wiper blade.
arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
If the color of the service indicator changes from
Installing the wiper blades black to yellow, the wiper blades should be
replaced.
i The duration of the color change varies
depending on the usage conditions.
X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm

in the direction of arrow :.
Windshield wipers 115
Replacing the rear window wiper blade Installing a wiper blade
Removing a wiper blade
X Position new wiper blade : with recess B

on lug A.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY- X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
LESS-GO start function: remove the Smart- arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining

Key from the ignition lock. clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS- X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated cor-
GO start function: switch off the engine. rectly.
X Fold wiper arm ? away from the rear window. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win-
X Press both release clips ;. dow.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
are jammed. movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
Z
116 Overview of climate control systems
Overview of climate control systems Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the
side trim panel in the cargo compartment clear
General notes (Y page 111). Otherwise the vehicle will not be
ventilated correctly.
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
up. warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
To prevent the windows from fogging up: opening feature (Y page 87). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
Climate control
Rswitch off climate control only briefly rior temperature will be reached more
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly quickly.
Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
i The integrated filter filters out most parti-
tion function cles of dust and soot and completely filters
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
briefly, if required and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto- amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
matic climate control regulates the temperature For this reason, you should always observe
and the humidity of the vehicle interior and fil- the interval for replacing the filter, which is
ters undesirable substances from the air. specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
The air-conditioning system or dual-zone auto- depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
matic climate control can only be operated heavy air pollution, the interval may be
when the engine is running. Optimum operation shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
is only achieved with the side windows and pan- let.
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed. i It is possible that under certain circumstan-
If you start the engine using your smartphone, ces the residual heat function may be activa-
the last selected climate control setting is reac- ted automatically an hour after the SmartKey
tivated (Y page 87). has been removed in order to dry the auto-
The residual heat function can only be activated matic climate control. The vehicle is then ven-
or deactivated with the ignition switched off tilated for 30 minutes.
(Y page 125).
Overview of climate control systems 117
Air-conditioning system control panel
Climate control
USA only
: Sets the temperature (Y page 122)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123)
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 122)
? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125)
A Sets the airflow (Y page 123)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121)
C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124)
Canada only
: Sets the temperature (Y page 122)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123)
= Sets the air distribution (Y page 122)
? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125)
A Sets the airflow (Y page 123)
118 Overview of climate control systems
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121)

C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124)
Notes on using the air-conditioning ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
system there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
Air-conditioning system since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
Climate control
air-recirculation mode.
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec- RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
ommendations to help you use the air-condi- trol system, the climate status display
tioning system optimally. appears for approximately three seconds at
RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by turn- the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
ing control knob A clockwise to the desired system display; see separate operating
position (except position 0). instructions. You will see the current settings
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). of the various climate control functions.
RRecommendation for avoiding misted
windows at low exterior temperatures or DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehu- Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
midification function (Y page 121).
You can choose between various drive programs
Set air distribution to ¯ and if possible with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
switch off P and O (Y page 122). (Y page 134).
Deactivate air-recirculation mode e If you have selected drive program E:
(Y page 125).
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is
Set airflow control A to a setting between 3
deactivated and in the warming-up phase
and 6 (Y page 123).
heat output is reduced
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set reduced
airflow control A to a setting between 3 and
6 (Y page 123). Depending on the configuration, climate set-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro-
RRecommendation for a constant vehicle
gram I.
interior temperature: set airflow control A
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli-
to a setting between 1 and 3 (Y page 123).
mate settings are not influenced.
RRecommendation for air distribution in
winter: select the O and ¯ settings
(Y page 122). ECO start/stop function
Recommendation for air distribution in During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
summer: select the P or P and ¯ control system only operates at a reduced capa-
settings (Y page 122). city. If you require the full climate control output,
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
briefly until the windshield is clear again. by pressing the ECO button (Y page 133).
Overview of climate control systems 119
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
USA only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122)
; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 122)
= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123)
? Increases the airflow (Y page 123)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 122)
B Display
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 121)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122)
F Activates or deactivates maximum cooling (Y page 124)
G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121)
H Reduces the airflow (Y page 123)
I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124)
J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123)
120
Climate control Overview of climate control systems
Canada only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122)
; Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 122)
= Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123)
? Increases the airflow (Y page 123)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 122)
B Display
C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125)
D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 121)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122)
F Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 125)
G Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121)
H Reduces the airflow (Y page 123)
I Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124)
J Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123)
Optimum use of dual-zone automatic since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
climate control air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
Climate control system ature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side as well. The indicator
The following contains instructions and recom- lamp in the á button goes out.
mendations to enable you to get the most out of RUse the residual heat function if you want to
your dual-zone automatic climate control. heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the
RActivate climate control using the Ã and ignition is switched off. The residual heat
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the function can only be activated or deactivated
Ã and ¿ buttons light up. with the ignition switched off.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). RIf you change the settings of the climate con-
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function trol system, the climate status display
briefly until the windshield is clear again. appears for approximately three seconds at
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in system display; see separate operating
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
Operating the climate control systems 121
instructions. You will see the current settings Dual-zone automatic climate control
of the various climate control functions.
DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
X To activate: press the Ã button.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
You can choose between various drive programs up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
with the DYNAMIC SELECT button matic mode.
(Y page 134). or
Climate control
If you have selected drive program E: X Press the ^ button.
Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
deactivated and in the warming-up phase out. The previously selected settings are
heat output is reduced restored.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
Rthe rear window defroster running time is
reduced The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Depending on the configuration, climate set-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro- i Dual-zone automatic climate control: switch
gram I. on climate control primarily using the Ã
If you have selected drive program C or S, cli- button.
mate settings are not influenced.
ECO start/stop function Switching cooling with air dehumidi-

fication on/off
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capa- General notes
city. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumid-
by pressing the ECO button (Y page 133). ification" function, the air inside the vehicle will
not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also
not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up
Operating the climate control sys- more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the
tems "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function
briefly.
Activating/deactivating climate con- The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
trol is only available when the engine is running. The
air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified
General notes according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
When the climate control is switched off, the air the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
supply and air circulation are also switched off. normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off tion.
climate control only briefly
X Press the ¿ button.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
tion lock (Y page 128). up or goes out.
X To switch on: turn control A clockwise to The indicator lamp in the button indicates that
the desired position (except position 0) the respective function is activated. The
(Y page 117). "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
X To switch off: turn control A counter-clock- has a delayed switch-off feature.
wise to position 0 (Y page 117).
122 Operating the climate control systems
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
¿ button flashes function.
three times or remains X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
off. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" func-
Climate control
tion cannot be switched

on.
Setting climate control to automatic Setting the temperature

General notes Air-conditioning system
The automatic climate control function is only You can set the temperature for the entire vehi-
available in conjunction with dual-zone auto- cle. The set temperature is automatically main-
matic climate control. tained at a constant level.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
tained automatically at a constant level. The lock (Y page 128).
system automatically regulates the temperature X To increase or reduce: turn control : coun-
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
ter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 117). Only
tribution.
change the temperature setting in small
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
is activated automatically in automatic mode.
Setting climate control to automatic Dual-zone automatic climate control

Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
er's and front-passenger sides. The set temper-
lock (Y page 128). ature is automatically maintained at a constant
X Set the desired temperature. level.
X To activate: press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights lock (Y page 128).
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated. X To increase or decrease: turn control : or
X To switch to manual mode: press the É

E counter-clockwise or clockwise
(Y page 119). Only change the temperature
or Ë button. setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
or (22 †).
X Press the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
deactivated. Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
P Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O Directs air through the footwell air vents
i You can also activate several air distribution Setting the airflow
settings simultaneously. To do this, press
multiple air distribution buttons. The air is Air-conditioning system
then directed through various vents.
i Regardless of the air distribution setting, tion lock (Y page 128).
airflow is always directed through the side air X To increase or reduce: turn control A coun-
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if ter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 117).
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they
Climate control
engage.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Setting the air distribution
X To increase or reduce: press the K or
X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons. I button.
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up
briefly.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
Dual-zone automatic climate control This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climate control.
Air distribution settings X To activate: press the á button.
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents The indicator lamp in the á button lights
P Directs air through the center and side air up.
vents The temperature setting for the driver's side
O Directs air through the footwell air vents is not adopted for the front-passenger side.
S Directs air through the center, side and X To deactivate: press the á button.
footwell vents The indicator lamp in the á button goes
b Directs air through the defroster, center out.
and side air vents The temperature setting for the driver's side
a Directs air through the defroster and is adopted for the front-passenger side.
footwell vents
_ Directs air through the defroster, center,
side and footwell vents
Defrosts the windshield
i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air General notes
vents. The side air vents can only be closed if You can use this function to defrost the wind-
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they shield or to clear a fogged up windshield and
engage. side windows.
Setting the air distribution i You should only select the "Windshield
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- defrosting" function until the windshield is
tion lock (Y page 128). clear again.
X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
until the desired symbol appears in the dis- Switching the "Windshield defrosting"
play. function on or off
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
124 Operating the climate control systems
The climate control system switches to the X To activate: press the Ù button.
following functions: The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
Rhigh airflow X To deactivate: press the Ù button.
Rhigh temperature The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
Rair distribution to the windshield and front
selected settings are restored.
side windows When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
Rair-recirculation mode off switches to the following functions:
i The "Windshield defrosting" function auto- Rmaximum cooling
Climate control
matically sets the blower level to the optimum Rmaximum airflow

defrosting effect. As a result, the airflow may Rair-recirculation mode on
increase or decrease automatically after the
¬ button is pressed.
i You can adjust the blower level manually Defrosting the windows
while the "Windshield defrosting" function is
in operation: Windows fogged up on the inside
RAir-conditioning system: turn airflow con-
trol A counter-clockwise or clockwise Air-conditioning system
(Y page 117). X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
RDual-zone automatic climate control: press ification" function.
the ó or ô button. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes i You should only select this setting until the
out. The previously selected settings are windshield is clear again.
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated. Dual-zone automatic climate control
or X Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
X Dual-zone climate control: press the Ã ification" function.
button. X Activate automatic mode Ã.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
automatic mode. i You should only select this setting until the
or windshield is clear again.
X Air-conditioning system: turn temperature
control : counter-clockwise or clockwise Windows fogged up on the outside
(Y page 117).
Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn XActivate the windshield wipers.
temperature control : or E counter-clock- XSet the air distribution to P or O.
wise or clockwise (Y page 119). i You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
MAX COOL maximum cooling

Rear window defroster
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehi-
cles for the USA. General notes
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running. The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window Activating/deactivating

defroster may switch off.
X Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster
The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating.
not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode X To deactivate: press the e button.

on/off The indicator lamp in the e button goes
out.
General notes
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if matically:
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from Rafter approximately five minutes at outside
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will temperatures below approximately 45 ‡
then be recirculated. (7 †)
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- Rafter approximately five minutes if the
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation tion is deactivated
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog- Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside
ging up.
temperatures above approximately 45 ‡
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the (7 †) if the "Cooling with dehumidification"
same for all control panels. function is activated
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
X To activate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights The residual heat function is only available in
up. vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic
Dual-zone automatic climate control: air- climate control.
recirculation mode is activated automatically: It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the vehicle for
Rat high outside temperatures approximately 30 minutes after the engine has
Rat high levels of pollution been switched off. The heating time depends on
When air-recirculation mode is activated auto- the set interior temperature.
matically, the indicator lamp in the e button
is not lit. Outside air is added after about
i The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
30 minutes.
126 Air vents
i If you activate the residual heat function at Setting the air vents
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
i You cannot use the ventilation to cool the
vehicle interior to a temperature lower than
the outside temperature.
Climate control
X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-

tion lock or remove it (Y page 128).
X Press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up or goes out. : Side window defroster vent
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that ; Side air vent
the respective function is activated. 3 Side air vent open
i Residual heat is deactivated automatically: 4 Side air vent closed
Rafter approximately 30 minutes X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
Rwhen the ignition is switched on side air vent ; to the left in position 3.
X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in
Rif the battery voltage drops
side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go to
position 4.
Air vents i The center and rear air vents are adjusted in
the same way.
G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Driving 127
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Driving

Important safety notes Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving G WARNING
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
Driving and parking

teach-in procedure. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
reach their optimum braking effect after several stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future. G WARNING
RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles of the pedals, e.g.:
(1500 km). Rshoes with thick soles
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
Rshoes with high heels
during this period.
Rslippers
RChange gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area There is a risk of an accident.
of the tachometer. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake usage of the pedals.
the vehicle.
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
G WARNING
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
RIdeally, for the first 1000 miles (1500 km),
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
drive in program E. safety-relevant functions are only available
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
vehicles: for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
of an accident.
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
RChange gear in good time.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase G WARNING
the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle If the parking brake has not been fully
to full speed. released when driving, the parking brake can:
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing-in if the engine or parts of the drive train on Roverheat and cause a fire
your vehicle have been replaced. Rlose its hold function.
Always observe the maximum permissible There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
speed. the parking brake fully before driving off.
Z
128 Driving
! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle Start/Stop button

stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until General notes
the engine has reached its operating temper- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
ature. SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
Only shift the automatic transmission to the GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- ton.
tionary. A check which periodically establishes a radio
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Driving and parking
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
You could otherwise damage the drive train. the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load
operation and engine speeds greater than When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This helps ignition lock, the system needs approximately
to protect the engine and avoids uncomfort- two seconds recognition time. You can then use
able driving. the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart-
Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
Key positions case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
SmartKey If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock
Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle
Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 70)
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
g To remove the SmartKey
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
(shift the transmission to position j)
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
and drive position control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time:
3 To start the engine Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
The engine cannot be started. unlocked again.
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (Y page 75), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
Driving 129
operates independently of the ECO start/stop You must also engage park position j.
automatic engine switch-off function. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
Key positions with the Start/Stop button lock ;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
Driving and parking

Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
Rthe electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine

: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock Important safety notes
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the G WARNING
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
For further information on situations in which an they could:
indicator lamp either fails to go out after the Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
engine is started or lights up while driving, people or road users.
please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster" (Y page 233). Rget out and disrupt traffic.
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
pressed, this is the same as the SmartKey being Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
removed from the ignition.
X To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once. Rrelease the parking brake.
The power supply is switched on. You can now Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
activate the windshield wipers, for example. park position P
The power supply is switched off again if: RStart the engine.
Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position When leaving the vehicle, always take the
X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on. vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
If you press Start/Stop button : once when reach of children.
in this position, the ignition is switched off
again. G WARNING
Removing the Start/Stop button gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
using the SmartKey.
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
You can only switch between Start/Stop button
mode and SmartKey operation when the vehicle out sufficient ventilation.
is stationary.
Z
130 Driving
G WARNING vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time.

Pay attention to the important safety notes.
Flammable materials introduced through
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
environmental influence or by animals can
depressed.
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
X Press the Start/Stop button once
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk (Y page 128).
of fire. The engine starts.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
Driving and parking
there are no flammable foreign materials in Starting procedure via smartphone

the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system. Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (Y page 129).
You can also start your engine via your smart-
General notes phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
previously selected climate control setting is
During a cold start, the engine runs at higher
activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
speeds to enable the catalytic converter to
interior of the vehicle before starting the jour-
reach its operating temperature. The sound of
ney.
the engine may change during this time.
Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is
safe to start and run the engine where your vehi-
Automatic transmission cle is parked.
X Shift the transmission to position j Observe the legal stipulations in the area where
(Y page 136). your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart-
The transmission position display in the mul- phone may be limited to certain countries or
tifunction display shows P (Y page 136). regions.
You can execute a maximum of two consecutive
i You can start the engine in transmission starting attempts via your smartphone. If you
position j and i. insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you
can carry out two more starting attempts.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via your smartphone at any
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead time.
of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop
button out of the ignition lock. You can only start the engine via your smart-
phone if:
tion lock (Y page 128) and release it as soon Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock
as the engine is running. Rpark position j is selected
Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated
button Rthe panic alarm is not activated
Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
Rthe hood is closed
vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey
into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button Rthe doors are closed and locked
must be inserted in the ignition lock and the Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for Also make sure that:
starting the engine operates independently of
Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled
the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-
tion. Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in G WARNING
the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
Driving 131
vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of another transmission position when the engine
injury. is running.
Always secure the engine against uninten- i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
tional starting before carrying out mainte- after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
nance or repair work.
more quickly.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via Information on the automatic release of the
your smartphone before carrying out mainte- electric parking brake (Y page 149).
Driving and parking

nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via your smartphone, for example, if you: Hill start assist
Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
Rdo not lock the doors forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
Ropen the hood holds the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
Pulling away the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
General notes G WARNING
G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
If the engine speed is above the idling speed ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
and you engage transmission position D or R, There is a risk of an accident and injury.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
a risk of an accident. brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
When engaging transmission position D or R, leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do assist.
not simultaneously accelerate. Hill start assist is not active if:
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a
away. downhill gradient.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled Rthe transmission is in position i.
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
You can open the doors from the inside at any RESP® is malfunctioning.
time. Further information on holding the vehicle sta-
You can also deactivate the automatic locking tionary on uphill gradients (Y page 140).
feature (Y page 200).
It is possible to shift the transmission from posi-
tion j to the desired position only if you ECO start/stop function
depress the brake pedal. Only then can the
parking lock be deactivated. Introduction
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if you do not depress the brake pedal, the The ECO start/stop function switches the
DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
parking lock remains engaged. under certain conditions.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not depress The engine starts automatically when the driver
the brake pedal, the selector lever can still be wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
moved but the parking lock remains engaged. function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡
(Ò20†), you can only shift out of position j into
Z
132 Driving
Important safety notes Rthe system detects that the windshield is not
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
G WARNING switched on.
If the engine is switched off automatically and Rthe hood is closed.
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. seat belt is fastened.
There is a risk of accident and injury. All of the vehicle's systems remain active when
the engine is stopped automatically.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
Driving and parking
The HOLD function can also be activated if the

the ignition and secure the vehicle against engine has been switched off automatically. It is
rolling away. then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
General notes you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine switch-off can take place a
maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then
three subsequent stops).
Automatic engine start

The engine starts automatically if:
: ECO start/stop display
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by
The ECO start/stop function is activated when- pressing the ECO button
ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or Rin transmission position D or N the brake
the Start/Stop button.
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
If the engine has been switched off automati- active
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the è
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal
ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis-
play. Ryou engage reverse gear R
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop Ryou move the transmission out of position P
function is only available in drive program C. Ryou activate the off-road program
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
Automatic engine switch-off er's door
Rthe vehicle starts to roll
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
Rthe brake system requires this
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
The ECO start/stop function is operational ates from the set range
when: Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
switched on
green.
Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low
Rthe off-road program is deactivated.
Shifting the transmission to position P does not
Rthe outside temperature is within the range
start the engine.
that is suitable for the system.
Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Driving 133
Deactivating or activating the ECO AMG Performance exhaust system

start/stop function (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between different AMG Per-
formance exhaust system volumes using the
position of the exhaust flap.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, the quietest set-
ting is activated.
Driving and parking

X To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then Setting the volume:
not be switched off automatically when the vehi- X Press button :.
cle stops. If you select the loudest setting, indicator
lamp ; lights up.
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 167) or Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 164).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again:
X Turn the SmartKey back to position g in the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X Try to start the engine again. Avoid excessively long and frequent
attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
Z
134 DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
start. You cannot hear discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
Driving and parking
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
smoothly and is misfir- component of the engine management system.
ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently.
above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
The coolant warning cool down.
lamp may also be on and
X Check the coolant level (Y page 276). Observe the warning notes
a warning tone may
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
sound.
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles

except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the

drive program. Depending on the drive program
selected the following vehicle characteristics
will change:
Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
Rthe steering
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe climate control: X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
Each time you start the engine with the Smart- times as necessary until the desired drive
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is program is selected.
activated. For further information about starting The selected drive program appears in the
the engine, see (Y page 131). multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out and the status icon of the
selected drive program appears.
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 135
In addition, the current drive program settings

are displayed briefly in the multimedia system
display.
i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
drive program, regardless of the display in the
multimedia system display.
Driving and parking

Available drive programs:
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-

cal driving characteristics X Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many
S Sport Sporty driving characteris- times as necessary until the desired drive
tics program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
I Individual Individual settings multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out and the status icon of the
Off-road Optimal driving characteris- selected drive program appears.
tics for easily negotiable off- The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC
road terrain SELECT controller : lights up in red.
E Economy Particularly economical Available drive programs:
driving characteristics
I Individual Individual settings
Additional information for drive programs C Comfort Comfort-oriented, opti-
(Y page 140). mum-economy engine and
You can also change gear yourself using the transmission settings
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manual drive program S Sport Sporty engine and trans-
(Y page 142). mission settings
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty trans-
mission settings
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
Race Maximum sportiness and
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
engine and transmission
settings suitable for the
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change racetrack
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle character-
istics will change: Additional information for drive programs
(Y page 140).
Rthe drive
You can also change gear yourself using the
Rthe transmission management steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
RESP® mation on the manual drive program
Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive (Y page 142).
sport suspension system)
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function
Rthe availability of gliding mode
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (Y page 131).
Z
136 Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its

original position. The current transmission posi-
Important safety notes tion j, k, i or h is shown in the transmis-
sion position display in the multifunction display
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R, Transmission position and drive pro-
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is gram display
Driving and parking
a risk of an accident. The current transmission position and drive pro-

When engaging transmission position D or R, gram appear in the multifunction display.
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
: Transmission position
accident.
; Gear
After switching off the engine, always switch
= Drive program display
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
brake. you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
DIRECT SELECT lever away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
Overview of transmission positions should select transmission position h and
drive program E or S.
Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from h to k, from k to h
or directly to j. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever switch in the
direction of arrow j.
Transmission position display j is shown in
j Park position with parking lock the multifunction display.
k Reverse gear When you have engaged park position j, make
i Neutral sure that the transmission position display
h Drive shows j in the multifunction display.
You can only engage park position j when the
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- vehicle is stationary.
cles): the DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of
Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT
the steering column.
SELECT lever up or down disengages the park-
For information on the selector lever in ing lock. The transmission is in neutral i.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 138).
Automatic transmission 137
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
(Ò20†), you can only shift out of park position motion if, for example, they:
j into another transmission position when the
engine is running. Rrelease the parking brake.
In order to shift from park position j directly Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
into k or h: park position P
Rdepress the brake pedal and RStart the engine.
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
Driving and parking

past the first point of resistance
Engaging park position P automatically SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
Park position j is automatically engaged if: vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey reach of children.
and remove the SmartKey
Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey X If the transmission is in position h or k:
or using the Start/Stop button and open the push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to
driver's door or front-passenger door the first point of resistance.
Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is X If the transmission is in position j: depress
stationary or when driving at a very low speed the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
and the transmission is in position h or k lever up or down to the first point of resist-
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans- ance.
mission shifts to transmission position j auto- If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
matically if the HOLD function or Distance Pilot sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
DISTRONIC is activated. Observe the informa- mission shifts to i automatically.
tion on the HOLD function (Y page 167) and With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 163). er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic
Engaging reverse gear R transmission shifts to j automatically.
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open
! Only move the automatic transmission to the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
k when the vehicle is stationary.
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto-
X Depress the brake and keep it pressed. matically.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the If you want the automatic transmission to
first point of resistance. remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi-
The ECO start/stop function is not available cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa- towing system:
tion on the ECO start/stop function X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
(Y page 132). remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
Shifting to neutral N X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
G WARNING X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, depressed.
they could: X Engage neutral i.
Ropen X Release the brake pedal.

the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users. X Release the electric parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Z
Engaging drive position D Engaging park position P

X If the transmission is in position k or i:
push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the
first point of resistance.
X If the transmission is in position j: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.
Driving and parking
Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-

cles)
Overview of transmission positions
X When the vehicle is stationary, press but-
ton :.
Engaging reverse gear R

! Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicle is stationary.
X Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
X Push the selector lever forwards past the first
point of resistance.
j Park position with parking lock

k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
Transmission position and drive pro-

gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
: Transmission position display

; Drive program display
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position h and
drive program C or S.
Transmission positions A Neutral

Do not shift the transmission to i
B Park position while driving. The automatic trans-
This prevents the vehicle from rolling mission could otherwise be dam-
away when stopped. aged.
Only shift the transmission to posi- No power is transmitted from the
tion j when the vehicle is station- engine to the drive wheels.
ary. The parking lock should not be Releasing the brakes will allow you to
Driving and parking

used as a brake when parking. move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
Always apply the electronic parking it or tow it.
brake in addition to the parking lock
in order to secure the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position i if the
In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g.
vehicle's electronics, the transmis- on icy roads.
sion may lock in position j. Have
the vehicle electronics checked If you switch the engine off with the
immediately at a qualified specialist transmission in position k or h,
workshop. the automatic transmission shifts to
i automatically.
Park position j is automatically
engaged if: ! Coasting in neutral i may
Ryou switch off the engine using the cause damage to the drive train.
SmartKey and remove the Smart- 7 Drive
Key
The automatic transmission changes
Ryou switch off the engine using the gear automatically. All forward gears
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop are available.
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door
Ryou open the driver's door when
the vehicle is stationary or when Driving tips
driving at a very low speed and the
transmission is in position h or Changing gear
k The automatic transmission shifts through the
C Reverse gear individual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position h. This automatic gear shift-
Only shift the transmission into posi- ing behavior is determined by:
tion k when the vehicle is station-
ary. Rthe selected drive program
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Accelerator pedal position

Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Z
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill For further information on kickdown in manual
gradients drive program M (Y page 144).
G WARNING Rocking the vehicle free

If the clutch overheats, the electronic man-
Shifting back and forth between transmission
agement system is automatically deactivated. positions h and k can help to free up the
This interrupts the power transmission. The vehicle if it gets stuck in mud or snow. The vehi-
vehicle may, for example, roll backwards on cle's engine management system limits the
Driving and parking
gradients. There is a risk of an accident. speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when

shifting back and forth. To shift repeatedly
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
between transmission positions h and k,
gradients by depressing the accelerator. move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down
past the point of resistance.
The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle
stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the
accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a
warning tone sounds. Drive programs
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi- All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG
cles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P'
vehicles)
Leave Engine Running display message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
only be able to continue your journey once the
Drive program C (Comfort)
clutch has cooled down and the display mes- Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
sage in the multifunction display has disap- ing:
peared. Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil handling characteristics.
Overheated Drive on with Care display Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
message appears in the multifunction display. and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gra- pedal is depressed fully.
dients by depressing the accelerator pedal. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on example on slippery road surfaces.
uphill gradients by: Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
Rdepressing the brake pedal automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
Ractivating the HOLD function The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
Rengaging the electric parking brake range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
Drive program S (Sport)
Kickdown Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. ing:
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Rsporty engine settings.
pressure point. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower The fuel consumption possibly being higher
gear depending on the engine speed. as a result of the later automatic transmission
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the shift points.
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up. Drive program I (Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of the
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
drive program can be selected:
use kickdown in the automatic drive program
and the temporary manual drive program M. Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage-
When manual drive program M is permanently ment)
activated, kickdown is not possible. Rthe steering
Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function When you activate cruise control or Distance
Rthe climate control Pilot DISTRONIC, gliding mode is not availa-
Information about configuring drive program I ble.
with the multimedia system can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual. Mercedes-AMG vehicles
i To permanently select the gears in drive Drive program I (Individual)
program I using the steering wheel paddle
shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the In drive program I the following properties of the
Driving and parking

drive. drive program can be selected:
Rthe drive (engine management)
Offroad drive program Rthe transmission management
The Off-road drive program is characterized by Rthe suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
the following: sport suspension system)
Rthe vehicle exhibits optimal driving charac- RESP®
teristics on easily negotiable off-road terrain. Information about configuring drive program I
Drive program E (Economy) with the multimedia system can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing: Drive program C (Comfort)
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the ing:
automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical
Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward handling characteristics.
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward
pedal is depressed fully. and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for pedal is depressed fully.
example on slippery road surfaces. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up example on slippery road surfaces.
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
less likely to spin. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed
Rgliding mode is activated automatically when range and the wheels are less likely to spin.
engine-internal conditions are fulfilled and Rgliding mode is available.
the accelerator is not depressed. At the same Rthe ECO start/stop function is available.
time the transmission’s clutch opens and the
vehicle rolls freely using its kinetic energy. As Drive program S (Sport)
a result great distances can be completed
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
without the engine brake and fuel consump-
tion reduced. ing:
Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character-
i The availability of gliding mode depends on istics.
various factors, including the following:
Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.
Rthe engine and transmission temperature The fuel consumption possibly being higher
Rthe downhill gradient as a result of the later automatic transmission
Rthe vehicle speed shift points.
Rperforming regular adaptation functions Rthe suspension exhibits stiff springing and
damping settings (vehicles with AIR adaptive
When you depress the brake pedal, gliding
sport suspension system).
mode is deactivated, depending on pedal
pressure. Rgliding mode is not available.
Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.
Z
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi-
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol- function display will show the current gear
lowing: instead of transmission position h.
If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears
Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving
will be selected automatically.
characteristics.
Temporary setting
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
Driving and parking
shift points.
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff
springing and damping settings (vehicles with
AMG adaptive sport suspension system).
Rgliding mode is not available.
Drive program RACE (vehicles with AMG

adaptive sport suspension system)
The RACE drive program is characterized by the
following:
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to
Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics position h.
suitable for the racetrack. X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;.
Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum
sportiness. Temporary setting will be active for a certain
amount of time. Under certain conditions the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun
a result of the later automatic transmission phase or when driving on steep terrain.
shift points.
X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle
Rthe suspension exhibits particularly hard
shifter ; and hold it in place.
springing and damping settings.
or
Rgliding mode is not available.
X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position.
or
X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
Manual gear shifting use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
General notes the drive program.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use the DYNAMIC
You can change gear yourself using the steering SELECT controller to change the drive pro-
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be gram.
in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheel paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift-
ing, you have two options:
Rtemporary setting
Rpermanent setting
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-

vehicles) cles): if the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up in order to
prevent engine damage.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
Driving and parking

the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine damage
X To activate: shift the selector lever to h. by not shifting down.
X Press button :.
X To deactivate: press button :. Shift recommendation
or
X If position D (automatic transmission) is
selected for the transmission in drive pro-
gram I: shift to drive program I with the
DYNAMIC SELECT controller.
Shifting gears
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic The gearshift recommendations assist you in
transmission does not shift up automatically adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
even when the engine limiting speed for the ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
current gear is reached. When the engine lim- display.
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to X Shift to recommended gear ; according to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always gearshift recommendation : when shown in
make sure that the engine speed does not the multifunction display.
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically even
when the engine limiting speed for the current
gear is reached. When the engine limiting
speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle

shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
Z
144 Refueling
During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using

the steering wheel paddle shifters.
If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gear when the
maximum engine speed is reached. This pre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
use kickdown in temporary manual drive pro-
Before the engine speed reaches the red area, gram M. When manual drive program M is per-
Driving and parking
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi- manently activated, kickdown is not possible.
function display.
X Shift to recommended gear : when mes-
sage ; is shown in the multifunction display.
Kickdown
X For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission no lon- X Shift the transmission to position j.
ger shifts into all of the
X Switch off the engine.
gears.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
Reverse gear can no lon-
ger be engaged. X Shift the transmission to position h.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling You must avoid fire, open flames, creating

sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
Important safety notes and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
G WARNING refueling.
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
G WARNING
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion. Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Refueling 145
You must make sure that fuel does not come Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, For further information on fuel and fuel quality
observe the following: (Y page 330).
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
Driving and parking

using soap and water.
Refueling
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with General information
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
Pay attention to the important safety notes
out delay.
(Y page 144).
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automat-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the
ing. SmartKey.
RImmediately change out of clothing which The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
has come into contact with fuel. æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on the
filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
G WARNING
Opening the fuel filler flap
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could : To open the fuel filler flap
result in damage to the fuel system and the ; Tire pressure table
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop = To insert the fuel filler cap
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely. ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted or KEYLESS‑GO
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the X Open the driver's door.
paintwork. The vehicle electronics are now in position
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. g. This is the same as the SmartKey being
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system removed from the ignition.
could otherwise be blocked by particles from X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
the fuel can. arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
Z
146 Refueling
X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
remove it. cle.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
inside of fuel filler flap =. 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel sage appears in the multifunction display
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and (Y page 219).
refuel. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle lamp may light up (Y page 238).
switches off. For further information on warning and indicator
Driving and parking
lamps in the instrument cluster, see

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops (Y page 238).
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.
Closing the fuel filler flap

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO
X Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position g. This is the same as
the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 69).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 76).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
Parking 147
Parking Switching off the engine

Important safety notes Important safety notes
G WARNING G WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or The automatic transmission switches to neu-
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with tral position N when you switch off the engine.
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
Driving and parking

gas flow. There is a risk of fire. accident.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- After switching off the engine, always switch
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to cle from rolling away by applying the parking
park on dry grassland or harvested grain brake.
fields.
Automatic transmission
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- X Apply the electric parking brake.
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: X All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): shift the transmission to position j.
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :.
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
etrain could be damaged. X With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to
position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
The immobilizer is activated.
rolling away unintentionally:
X With the Start/Stop button: press the
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
Start/Stop button (Y page 128).
Rthe transmission must be in position j and The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
the transmission position display must show the instrument cluster go out.
j in the multifunction display. If the driver's door is closed, this is the same
Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the igni- as key position 1. If the driver's door is open,
tion lock. this is the same as key position g, i.e. the
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front SmartKey having been removed.
wheels must be turned towards the curb. If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
Z
148 Parking
the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic The function of the electric parking brake is
transmission shifts to j automatically. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
With the Start/Stop button: if you then open board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in
the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the system, it may not be possible to apply the
the automatic transmission shifts to j auto- released parking brake.
matically. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
If you want the automatic transmission to level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling
remain in neutral i, e.g. when having the vehi- away.
cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a X Shift the automatic transmission to position
Driving and parking
towing system: j.
X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: It may not be possible to release an applied
remove the Start-Stop button from the igni- parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
tion lock. there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. qualified specialist workshop.
X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. The electric parking brake performs a function
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it test at regular intervals while the engine is
depressed. switched off. The sounds that can be heard while
X Engage neutral i.
this is occurring are normal.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the electric parking brake.
Applying or releasing manually
X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Electric parking brake

General notes
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake. X To engage: push handle :.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
parking position P.
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
Rstart the engine. ment cluster.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- The electric parking brake can also be applied
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of when the SmartKey is removed.
an accident and injury. X To release: pull handle :.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. goes out.
The electric parking brake can only be
released:
Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 128) or
Rif the ignition was switched on using the
Start/Stop button
Parking 149
Applying automatically If your seat belt is not fastened, the following

conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
The electric parking brake is automatically release the electric parking brake:
applied when the transmission is in position j
Rthe driver's door is closed
and:
Ryou are shifting from transmission position
Rthe engine is switched off or
j or have previously driven at speeds
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the greater than 2 mph (3 km/h)
driver's door is opened Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator
To prevent the electric parking brake from being
Driving and parking

pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, the parking
automatically applied, pull handle :. brake will be released and the vehicle will start
The electric parking brake is also engaged auto- to move.
matically if:
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC brings the vehicle Emergency braking
to a standstill or
The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-
Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
gency by using the electric parking brake.
tionary
X While driving, push handle : of the electric
RParking Pilot is keeping the vehicle stationary
parking brake (Y page 148).
In addition, at least one of the following condi- The vehicle is braked as long as you keep
tions must be fulfilled: handle : of the electric parking brake
Rthe engine is switched off pressed. The longer the electric parking brake
Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the handle : is depressed, the greater the brak-
driver's door is opened ing force.
Rthere is a system malfunction During braking:
Rthe power supply is insufficient Ra warning tone sounds
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period Rthe Release Parking Brake message
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) appears
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
out. only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
The electric parking brake is not automatically flashes
engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
start/stop function. still, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Releasing automatically
Parking the vehicle for a long period
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto-
matically released if all of the following condi- If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
tions are met: four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
Rthe engine is running exhaustive discharging.
Rthe transmission is in position h or k and If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
you depress the accelerator pedal or shift weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
from position j to h or k result of lack of use.
Rthe seat belt has been fastened X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
If the transmission is in position k, the tailgate advice.
must be closed.
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Z
150 Driving tips
Driving tips tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-

play.
General notes Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
Important safety notes rain.
G WARNING Drinking and driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available G WARNING
Driving and parking
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
for example, the power steering and the brake driving are very dangerous combinations.
boosting effect. You will require considerably Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
of an accident. ment.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
G WARNING take drugs and drive.
If you operate mobile communication equip- Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
ment when driving, you may be distracted anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
from the traffic situation. You could also lose ing drugs.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Emission control
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary. G WARNING
Observe the legal requirements for the country gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
driving a vehicle. is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
If you make a call while driving, always use the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone out sufficient ventilation.
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop Certain engine systems are designed to keep
before operating the telephone. the level of poisonous components in exhaust
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph fumes within legal limits.
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a These systems only work at peak efficiency if
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec- they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
ond. manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
Drive sensibly – save fuel specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Observe the following tips to save fuel: Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
RThe tires should always be inflated to the rec-
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
ommended tire pressure. workshop.
RRemove unnecessary loads.
The engine settings must not be changed under
RRemove roof racks when they are not needed. any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. service work must be carried out at regular
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
RHave all maintenance work carried out as Benz service requirements. Details can be found
indicated by the service intervals in the Main- in the Maintenance Booklet.
Driving tips 151
ECO display The ECO display consists of three sections, with

an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
The ECO display shows you how economical spond to the following three categories:
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achieving the most economical driving style : Acceleration (evaluation of the
for the selected settings and prevailing condi- acceleration processes):
tions. Your driving style can significantly influ- Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
ence the vehicle's consumption. area lights up green: moderate
acceleration, especially at higher
Driving and parking

speeds
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera-
tion processes):
: Acceleration Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
; Coasting area lights up green: anticipatory
= Constant driving, keeping your distance and
? Additional range achieved early release of the accelerator.
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and The vehicle can coast without use
represents the additional range achieved since of the brakes.
the beginning of the journey as a result of an Rthe outer area empties and the
adapted driving style. inner area is gray: frequent heavy
If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve braking
range, the Fuel Low message is shown in the = Constant (continuous evaluation
multifunction display instead of range ?. The over the entire journey):
8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 238). Rthe outer area fills up and the inner
area lights up green: constant
speed and avoidance of unneces-
sary acceleration and deceleration
Rthe outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driving

style and light up green as a result of a particu-
larly economical driving style. Depending on the
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three outer
areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco-
nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more
economical driving style. If the three outer areas
are completely filled at the same time, the driver
has adopted the most economical driving style
for the selected settings and prevailing condi-
tions. The ECO display border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achieved range
displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not
indicate a fixed consumption reduction.
Z
152 Driving tips
In addition to driving style, the actual consump- helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and
tion is affected by other factors, such as: wearing them out excessively.
RLoad When you take advantage of engine braking, it
RTire pressure is possible that a drive wheel will not rotate for
some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface.
RCold start
This could cause damage to the drive train.
RChoice of route This type of damage is not covered by the
RActive electrical consumers Mercedes-Benz warranty.
These factors are not included in the ECO dis- Briefly depressing the accelerator pedal on
Driving and parking
play. downhill gradients while the manual drive pro-

An economical driving style specially requires gram M is temporarily activated: the automatic
driving at moderate engine speeds. transmission may switch to the last active auto-
Achieving a higher value in the categories matic drive program E or S. The automatic trans-
"Acceleration" and "Constant": mission may shift to a higher gear. This can
reduce the engine's braking effect.
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive the vehicle in drive program C or E
Heavy and light loads
(vehicles with a DYNAMIC SELECT button).
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the G WARNING
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
The ECO display summarizes the driving style driving, the braking system can overheat. This
from the start of the journey to its completion. increases the stopping distance and can even
Therefore, there are more marked changes in cause the braking system to fail. There is a
the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon- risk of an accident.
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
marked changes, perform a manual rest
(Y page 194). depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(Y page 193).
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
Braking
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
Important safety notes load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive
on for a short while. This allows the airflow to
G WARNING cool the brakes more quickly.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Wet roads
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
There is an increased danger of skidding and without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
accidents. tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- been washed or driven through deep water.
ing on a slippery road surface.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
Downhill gradients vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
! On long and steep gradients, you must washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
lower gear in good time. This allows you to brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
take advantage of engine braking. For this you and protecting them against corrosion.
must first activate manual gearshifting. This
Driving tips 153
Limited braking performance on salt- If the brake system has only been subject to
treated roads moderate loads, you should test the functional-
ity of your brakes at regular intervals.
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi- You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
due may form on the brake discs and brake on (Y page 60).
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have
braking distance.
brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle
RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz
brakes occasionally while paying attention to vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent
Driving and parking

the traffic conditions. quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles
beginning and end of a journey. or which are not of an equivalent quality could
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle affect your vehicle's operating safety.
ahead. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved for
Servicing the brakes your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-
sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: fluid which has not been approved for
Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an
the instrument cluster and equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is
running
Checking brake lining thickness
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display. You can measure the break pad/lining thick-
The brake fluid level may be too low due to ness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. red) on the test gage allows you to determine
Have the brake system checked immediately. whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle docu-
arrange this. ment wallet in the glove box.
! A function or performance test should only

be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-
erwise damage the drive train or the brake
system.
! As the ESP® system operates automatically,
the engine and the ignition must be switched
off (the SmartKey must be in position u or
1 in the ignition lock), if the electric parking
brake is tested on a braking dynamometer
(maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may
cause severe damage to the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
Front wheel
cialist workshop.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
154 Driving tips
Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
planing occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth
Driving and parking
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in

conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
Rlower your speed
Ravoid ruts
Ravoid sudden steering movements
Rbrake carefully
Rear wheel
Driving on flooded roads
X Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable
position so that you can attach test gage A. ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away or in the opposite direction create waves. This
(Y page 147). may cause the maximum permissible water
X Engage park position P. depth to be exceeded.
X Switch off the engine. Failure to observe these notes may result in
damage to the engine, electrical systems and
X Place test gage A between the wheel's
transmission.
spokes on brake pad/lining =.
X Hold test gage A vertically on brake disc : If you have to drive on stretches of road on which
and slide measuring pin ; onto brake water has collected, please bear in mind that:
disc :. Rin the case of standing water, the water level
X Check which color field ? the arrow on may be no higher than the lower edge of the
measuring pin ; is pointing to. vehicle body
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is suf- Ryou should drive no faster than at a walking
ficient. pace
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Winter driving
To avoid an inaccurate measurement:
G WARNING
Rmake sure you position the wheels suitably
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
the brake disc
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
Driving tips 155
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle risk of an accident.
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fatal injury. fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating vehicle.
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To G WARNING
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
Driving and parking

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
window on the side of the vehicle that is not twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
facing into the wind. hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur- check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and particular, remove parts of plants or other
braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or flammable materials which have become
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be qualified specialist workshop.
stopped when moving at low speed:
X Shift the transmission to position N. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
X Try to bring the vehicle under control using Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
corrective steering. curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
Changes in the outside temperature are dis- parts of the chassis
played after a short delay. In situations like this, the body, the under-
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
point do not guarantee that the road surface is damaged without the damage being visible.
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in Components damaged in this way can unex-
wooded areas or on bridges. pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
You should pay special attention to road condi- longer withstand the loads they are designed
tions when temperatures are around freezing to.
point. If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
For more information on driving with snow bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
chains, see (Y page 305). twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
For more information on driving with summer come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
tires, see (Y page 304). system, they can catch fire.
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec- In such situations, have the vehicle checked
tion (Y page 304). and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
Off-road driving pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic condi-
Important safety notes tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G WARNING
The vehicle is only designed for easily negotiable
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or off-road terrain and poor road surfaces.
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle When driving off-road, substances such as sand,
mud and water or water mixed with oil may get
Z
156 Driving tips
into the brakes. This could result in a reduced RCheck that items of luggage and loads are
braking effect or in total brake failure and also in stowed safely and are well secured
increased wear and tear. The braking charac- (Y page 256).
teristics change depending on the material RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
entering the brakes. Clean the brakes after driv- when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate
ing off-road. If you detect a reduced braking DSR (Y page 170).
effect or grinding noises, have the brake system RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a
checked in a qualified specialist workshop as walking pace.
soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the
REnsure that the wheels are in contact with the
Driving and parking
different braking characteristics.

ground at all times.
Driving off-road increases the likelihood of dam-
RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road
age to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to
failure of the mechanical assembly or systems. routes where visibility is poor. For safety rea-
Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain con- sons, get out of the vehicle first and survey
ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the the off-road route.
vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified spe- RCheck the depth of water before fording rivers
cialist workshop. and streams.
Do not shift into transmission position i when RWatch out for obstacles.
driving off-road. You could lose control of the RTake care when turning on an uphill or down-
vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehicle using hill slope or when driving across a slope. The
the service brake. If the gradient is too steep for vehicle could otherwise tip over.
your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear. RAlways keep the side windows and the pano-
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed
General notes during the journey.
RDo not deviate from marked routes.
H Environmental note RDo not use the HOLD function when driving
Protection of the environment is of primary off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
importance. Treat nature with respect. or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
Observe all prohibiting signs. function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
faces.
Read this section carefully before driving your
vehicle off-road. Checklist before driving off-road
Off-road driving is only possible with the X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level
ON&OFFROAD package.
and add oil if necessary.
The following driving systems are specially
When driving on steep gradients, the engine
adapted for driving over easily negotiable off-
oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a
road terrain:
correct oil supply in the vehicle.
ROff-road program (Y page 171) X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depth
ROff-road ABS (Y page 60) and tire pressure.
ROff-road 4ETS (Y page 63) X Check for damage and remove any foreign
ROff-road ESP® (Y page 66) objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) tires.
(Y page 170) X Replace any missing valve caps.
Observe the following notes: X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
RStop the vehicle before starting to drive along X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a loss
an off-road route. If necessary, activate the of tire pressure and damage the tire bead.
off-road program (Y page 134). Before driving off-road, check the wheels and
RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure
replace them if necessary.
there is always sufficient ground clearance.
Driving tips 157
Checklist after driving off-road RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after the terrain.
driving off-road, have the vehicle checked RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-
immediately at a qualified specialist work- ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could
shop. become stuck in loose ground.
X Deactivate off-road program (Y page 134). RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 170). ble. Make sure that:
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and - the tire ruts are not too deep.
Driving and parking

check for damage. - the sand is sufficiently firm.
X Clean the front and rear license plates. - the ground clearance of the vehicle is suf-
X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet ficient.
and remove any foreign objects.
X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the Tire ruts and gravel roads
vehicle underside with a water jet; check for
any foreign objects and damage. ! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
X Check whether twigs or other parts of plants that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
have become trapped. These increase the risk Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake bottom out and get stuck.
hoses or the air bellows of the axle joints and Observe the following rules when driving along
propeller shafts. ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loose
X After the trip, examine without fail the entire gravel:
undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body- RActivate the off-road program (Y page 134).
work structure, steering, chassis and exhaust RAvoid high engine speeds.
system for damage. RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
X After driving in sand, mud, gravel, water or ing wheel paddle shifter.
similar dirty conditions, have the following RDrive slowly.
checked and cleaned:
RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the
Rbrake discs
wheels of one side on the center grassy area,
Rwheels if possible.
Rbrake pads
Raxle joints
X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road Traveling uphill
travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels
and drive train and remove them if necessary. Approach/departure angle
Foreign objects can disturb the balance and
cause vibrations. G WARNING
Driving over poor road surfaces places greater If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
demands on your vehicle than driving on normal turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle. could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
This allows you to detect damage promptly and risk of an accident.
reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and
other road users. Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
Driving on sand vehicle.
Observe the following rules when driving on RObserve the warnings for off-road driving
sand: (Y page 155).
RActivate the off-road program (Y page 134). RFollow the line of fall when driving on slopes
RAvoid high engine speeds. and steep inclines.
Z
158 Driving systems
RBefore driving on extreme uphill and downhill RShift to a lower gear using the left-hand steer-
gradients, select the off-road program ing wheel paddle shifter before tackling steep
(Y page 134). downhill gradients.
RDrive slowly. RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
RAccelerate gently and make sure that the gently. When doing so, make sure that the
wheels are gripping. vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of
RAvoid high engine speeds, except when driv- fall.
ing on sandy and muddy routes with high driv- RCheck that the brakes are working normally
ing resistance. after a long downhill stretch.
Driving and parking
RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle Off-road ABS is activated when the off-road pro-
shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to gram is selected.
the gradient. At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h), the front
RUse the left-hand steering wheel paddle wheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-
shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces
on long and steep downhill gradients. the stopping distance on off-road terrain. The
Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on steerability of the vehicle is considerably
a hill. For further information about hill start reduced if the wheels lock.
assist, see (Y page 131).
Do not shift into transmission position i when
driving off-road. You could lose control of the Driving systems
vehicle if you attempt to brake the vehicle using
the service brake. If the gradient is too steep for Cruise control
your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
General notes
Always observe the approach/departure angle
values (Y page 336). Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
Maximum gradient-climbing capability exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is
Always observe the maximum gradient climbing laden, you must select a low gear in good time.
ability values (Y page 336). You need to shift manually using the steering
wheel paddle shifters beforehand. By doing so,
Hilltops you will make use of the braking effect of the
engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly tem and prevents the brakes from overheating
reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately and wearing too quickly.
before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of When the engine is running, you can use the
the vehicle's own impetus to travel over the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any
brow. speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and the tech-
This style of driving prevents: nically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
brow of a hill ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down
speed for a prolonged period.
the other side The speed indicated in the speedometer may
differ slightly from the speed stored.
Driving downhill
RDrive slowly.
RDo not drive at an angle down steep inclines.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-
Steer into the line of fall and drive with the trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
Driving systems 159
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
good time and for staying in your lane. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
Do not use cruise control: down ;.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
heavy traffic or on winding roads matically maintains the stored speed.
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
Driving and parking

traction and the vehicle could then skid stored speed is resumed when the gradient
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or evens out. Cruise control maintains the
snow stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored. Storing the current speed or calling up the
last stored speed
Cruise control lever
G WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
: Activates or increases speed
; Activates or reduces speed
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
= Deactivates cruise control
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
? Activates at the current speed/last stored The first time cruise control is activated, it
speed stores the current speed or regulates the
When you activate cruise control, the stored speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for speed.
five seconds.
Setting a speed
Activation conditions
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
To activate cruise control, all of the following until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
activation conditions must be fulfilled: the speed set.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : past the pres-
Storing, maintaining and calling up a sure point for a higher speed, or down ; for
a lower speed.
speed
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
Storing and maintaining the current ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
speed the cruise control lever up : to the pressure
point for a higher speed, or down ; for a
You can store the current speed if you are driv- lower speed.
ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Z
160 Driving systems
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you Distance Pilot DISTRONIC operates in the range
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph
you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con- (200 km/h).
trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last Change into a lower gear in good time on long
speed stored after you have finished overtak- and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
ing. important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
Deactivating cruise control This relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-
Driving and parking
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con- ing too quickly.
trol: Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC on roads
X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards with steep gradients.
=. For Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to assist you
or when driving, the radar sensor system must be
X Brake. operational.
Since Distance Pilot DISTRONIC transmits radar
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of
Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric park- the responsible authorities. You can refer to the
ing brake relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) questions are asked about this.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® i USA only: This device has been approved by
Ryou shift the transmission to position i the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
while driving radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
trol Off message in the multifunction display ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
for approximately five seconds. not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
i When you switch off the engine, the last Any unauthorized modification to this device
speed stored is cleared. could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC i Canada only: This device complies with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
General notes subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC regulates the speed and
and automatically helps you maintain the dis- 2. This device must accept any interference
tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles received, including interference that may
are detected with the aid of the radar sensor cause undesired operation of the device.
system. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes auto-
matically to avoid exceeding the set speed or to Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
maintain the designated distance from the vehi- will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
cle in front. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that there is
a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually Any unauthorized modification to this device
and acoustically. Without your intervention, Dis- could void the user's authority to operate the
tance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot prevent a colli- equipment.
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately
in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in
front or take evasive action provided it is safe to
do so.
Driving systems 161
Important safety notes To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
G WARNING function in the following or similar situations:
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC does not react to: Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rpeople Rin the car wash

or animals
Rstationary objects on the road, e.g. stopped If you fail to adapt your driving style, Distance
or parked vehicles Pilot DISTRONIC can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Driving and parking

Roncoming vehicles and crossing traffic Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot take into
As a result, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may account road, weather or traffic conditions. Dis-
neither give warnings nor intervene in such tance Pilot DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
situations. There is a risk of an accident.
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- and for staying in your lane.
uation and be ready to brake. Do not use Distance Pilot DISTRONIC:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
G WARNING allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC cannot always heavy traffic or on winding roads
clearly identify other road users and complex Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
traffic situations. erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
In such cases, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may:
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then heavy rain or snow
brake the vehicle Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may not detect nar-
Rneither give a warning nor intervene row vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
There is a risk of an accident. impaired if:
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
brake, especially if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC covering the sensors
warns you. Rthere is snow or heavy rain
Rthere is interference by other radar sources
G WARNING Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle ple, in parking garages
with up to 50% of the maximum possible If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC no longer detects a
deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi- vehicle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate
cient, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC alerts you to the speed stored.
with a visual and acoustic warning. There is a This speed may:
risk of an accident. Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or
Apply the brakes yourself in these situations an exit lane
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand lane
and try to take evasive action.
that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand
lane
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
brakes automatically in certain situations. cles driving in the right lane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Z
162 Driving systems
Cruise control lever Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?, up : or down ;.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up : or
down ; until the desired speed is set.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
Driving and parking
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired

stored speed.
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the Distance Pilot Suspended mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. The
: Stores the current speed or a higher speed set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
; Stores the current speed or a lower speed front will then not be maintained. You will be
= Deactivates Distance Pilot DISTRONIC driving at the speed you determine by the
? Stores the current speed or calls up the last position of the accelerator pedal.
stored speed You can also activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
A Sets a specified minimum distance when stationary. The lowest speed that can be
set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
Activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Driving with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
Activation conditions
Activating at the current speed/last
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the stored speed
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations. G WARNING
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate If you call up the stored speed and it differs
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
function in the following or similar situations: ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Rwhen towing the vehicle stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
Rin the car wash brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
To activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC, the fol- dent.
lowing conditions must be fulfilled: Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
two minutes of driving before Distance Pilot do not know the stored speed, store the
DISTRONIC is ready for use. desired speed again.
Rthe electric parking brake must be released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
RParking Pilot must not be activated.
you ?.
Rthe transmission must be in position h.
The first time Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
activated, it stores the current speed or reg-
shift from j to h or your seat belt must be ulates the speed of the vehicle to the previ-
fastened. ously stored speed.
Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.
RDSR must be deactivated.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Driving systems 163
Pulling away and driving Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
X If you want to pull away with Distance RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC does not currently
Pilot DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the detect a danger of collision
brake pedal. If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
you ?. changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
or between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
becomes too small.
X If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated:
Driving and parking

accelerate briefly. Stopping
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects that the
to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to until it is stationary.
the set speed.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing tionary and you do not need to depress the
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ- brake.
ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
brakes automatically. Be ready to brake at all i After a time, the electric parking brake
times. secures the vehicle and relieves the service
If there is no vehicle in front, Distance Pilot brake.
DISTRONIC operates in the same way as cruise i Depending on the specified minimum dis-
control. tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a slower- a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in
moving vehicle in front, it brakes your vehicle. In front. The specified minimum distance is set
this way, the distance you have selected is main- using the control on the cruise control lever.
tained.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a faster- the transmission is shifted automatically to
moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving position j if:
speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated
up to the speed you have stored. Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
when you depress the brake, except when the matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
vehicle is stationary. function.
Selecting the drive program The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC supports a sporty activated when the vehicle is stationary and:
driving style when you select the S+ drive pro-
gram (Y page 140) or the manual drive program Ra system malfunction occurs.
(Y page 142). Acceleration behind the vehicle in Rthe power supply is insufficient.
front or to the set speed is then noticeably more If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may
dynamic. If you have selected the E (Mercedes- also shift to position j automatically.
AMG vehicles: C) drive program, the vehicle
accelerates more gently. This setting is recom- Setting a speed
mended in stop-and-start traffic.
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
Changing lanes until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
If when driving on multilane roads you wish to the speed set.
change to the overtaking lane, Distance Pilot X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
DISTRONIC supports you if: higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is maintaining the ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
distance to a vehicle in front
Z
164 Driving systems
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to X To increase: turn control = in direction ;.

the pressure point. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
The last stored speed increases or decreases greater distance between your vehicle and
in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments. the vehicle in front.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- X To decrease: turn control = in direction :.
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintains a
the cruise control lever up : or down ; shorter distance between your vehicle and
beyond the pressure point. the vehicle in front.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
Driving and parking
in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.

Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
i Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
Setting a specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distance for
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
span between one and two seconds. With this
function you can set the minimum distance that
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintains to the vehi- There are several ways to deactivate Distance
cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You Pilot DISTRONIC:
can see this distance in the multifunction dis- X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
play (Y page 172). wards :.
The specified minimum distance can be or
changed while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
switched on or off.
i Make sure that you maintain the minimum X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
distance to the vehicle in front as required by wards :.
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front or
if necessary. X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot Off message appears in
the multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine. Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you depress
the accelerator pedal.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically deac-
tivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the
vehicle is automatically secured with the elec-
tric parking brake
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in position j, k or i
Driving systems 165
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you

in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
Rthe vehicle is skidding
Ryou switch on Parking Pilot
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is automatically
deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The
Distance Pilot Off message appears in the
multifunction display for approximately five sec-
Driving and parking

onds.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is also automatically
deactivated when you activate DSR. The Ã
: Vehicle in front, if detected
DSR symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play. ; Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC displays in in front; adjustable
the instrument cluster ? Your vehicle
Displays in the speedometer X Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 198).
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is

activated
You will initially see the stored speed for about
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC.
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-

ted and there are no vehicles detected in front,
one or two segments ; in the set speed range
light up.
If Distance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
front, segments ; between speed of the vehi-
cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
: Vehicle in front, if detected
i For design reasons, the speed displayed in ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
the speedometer may differ slightly from the in front; adjustable
speed set for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. = Your vehicle
Display when Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is ? Distance Pilot DISTRONIC active (text only
deactivated appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated)
In the Assistance menu (Y page 197) of the on-
board computer, you can select the assistance X Select the Assistance Graphic function
display. using the on-board computer (Y page 198).
Z
166 Driving systems
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
DISTRONIC having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
General notes function deactivated when you depress the
Pay particular attention in the following traffic accelerator pedal to pull away.
situations:
RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
G WARNING
Driving and parking
vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi-

cle may brake unexpectedly or late. When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
RDriving on a different line: Distance Pilot despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
not driving in the middle of their lane. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short. the voltage supply.
ROther vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut- pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
too short. Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
RNarrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
partment, the battery or the fuses have
has not yet detected the vehicle in front on
been tampered with.
the edge of the road because of its narrow
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will Rthe battery is disconnected
be too short. There is a risk of an accident.
RObstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
detected vehicle turns a corner and an obsta- against rolling away.
cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis-
tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for ! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
them. HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly brakes automatically in certain situations.
detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
following situations, the vehicle could pull function in the following or similar situations:
away unintentionally: Rwhen towing the vehicle
- At traffic lights with crossing traffic, for Rin the car wash
example.
- With a vehicle ahead on the other side of an
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 167).
intersection and the HOLD function active.
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance Activation conditions
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated. You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
HOLD function
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
General notes function
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the fastened
following situations: Rthe electric parking brake is released
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rthe transmission is in position h, k or i
Rwhen waiting in traffic on vehicles with automatic transmission
Driving systems 167
Activating the HOLD function The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if the HOLD function is activated
when the vehicle is stationary and:
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
Start-off Assist (except Mercedes-
Driving and parking

AMG vehicles)
X Make sure that the activation conditions are
met. Important safety notes
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further G WARNING
until : appears in the multifunction display. If you use start-off assist, individual wheels
The HOLD function is activated. You can may start to spin and the vehicle may skid. If
release the brake pedal.
ESP® is deactivated, there is a greater danger
i If depressing the brake pedal the first time of skidding and having an accident. Make sure
does not activate the HOLD function, wait that no persons or obstacles are in the vicinity
briefly and then try again. of the vehicle.
Deactivating the HOLD function Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration

from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically road surface is required, along with the tires and
if: vehicle being in proper operating condition.
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic Do not activate start-off assist on public roads.
transmission: only when the transmission is in Observe the safety notes on driving safety sys-
position h or k. tems (Y page 59).
Rthe transmission is in position j on vehicles Be sure to read the safety notes and information
with automatic transmission. on ESP® (Y page 63).
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
tain amount of pressure until : disappears Activating start-off assist
from the multifunction display.
Ryou activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC. X Deactivate ESP® (Y page 198).
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park- X Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
ing brake. position.
X Depress the brake pedal hard with your left
i After a time, the electric parking brake foot and keep it depressed.
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake. X Shift the transmission to position D.
X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
mission is automatically shifted to position j the S drive program (Y page 134).
if: X Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open. accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
ation.
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function. i Activate ESP® as soon as the acceleration
process has ended. ESP® will otherwise not
be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle
starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Z
168 Driving systems
Canceling start-off assist Activating RACE START

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
X Reactivate ESP®. and keep it depressed.
X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shift-
ers.
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi- X The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
cles) Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in
the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
Important safety notes X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.
i RACE START must not be used on normal i If the activation conditions are no longer ful-
roads. RACE START must only be activated filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE
and used on dedicated road circuits, outside START Not Possible See Operator's
of public road use. Manual message appears in the multifunction
display.
i RACE START is only available in X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. shifter (Y page 142).
G WARNING or
If you use RACE START, individual tires may X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-
start to spin and the vehicle could skid. dle shifter (Y page 142).
The RACE START Available Depress gas
Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there pedal message appears in the multifunction
is an increased risk of skidding and having an display.
accident. Make sure that no persons, animals i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal
or obstacles are within range of the vehicle. within a few seconds, RACE START is can-
celed. The multifunction display shows the
RACE START enables optimal acceleration from RACE START Canceled message.
a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
road surface is required and the vehicle and tires
must be in good working order. The engine speed is increased.
The RACE START Release brake to start
i Observe the safety notes on driving safety message appears in the multifunction display.
systems (Y page 59).
i If you do not release the brake pedal within
Be sure to read the safety notes and informa- a short time, RACE START will be canceled.
tion on ESP® (Y page 63). The multifunction display shows the RACE
START Canceled message.
Conditions for activation X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
You can activate RACE START if: accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
Rthe doors, hood and the trunk lid are closed. ation.
Rthe engine is running and the transmission, The RACE START Active message appears in
all-wheel drive clutch and the engine are at the multifunction display.
operating temperature.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.
position.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
depressed (left foot). START or if any of the activation conditions are
Rthe transmission is in position h. no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐
Rdrive program S, S+ or RACE is selected sible See Operator's Manual or RACE
(Y page 135) START Canceled message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Driving systems 169
i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes-
short period of time, it is only available again sage appears in the multifunction display.
after the vehicle has been driven a certain
distance. Comfort mode
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys- your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this
tem mode if you favor a more comfortable driving
style, but also when driving fast on straight
Driving and parking

General notes roads, e.g. highways.
X Press button : again so that indicator
The electronically controlled damping system lamp ; goes out.
works continuously. This improves driving You have selected Comfort mode.
safety and ride comfort.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT mes-
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel sage appears in the multifunction display.
and depends on:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
4MATIC
Ryour individual selection of Sport or Comfort
The suspension setting is adjusted using the ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
corresponding button in the center console. This may damage the differential. Damage of
this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
i The mode can also be set using the AMG Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (Y page 135). either on the ground or be fully raised.
Each time you start the engine with the Smart- Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is cle with all wheels in full contact with the
activated. For further information about starting ground.
the engine, see (Y page 131). 4MATIC, together with ESP®, improves the trac-
tion of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel
Sport mode spins due to insufficient grip.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
RAccelerate less when driving.
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
Sport mode ensures even better contact with effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
the road. Select this mode when employing a use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country if necessary.
roads.
X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected
Sport mode.
Z
170 Driving systems
DSR Activating/deactivating DSR
General notes If you activate DSR and no speed has been set,
the vehicle decelerates to 4 mph (Canada:
i DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is only 6 km/h).
available for vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD You can only activate DSR when driving at
package. speeds below 19 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-
hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed
Driving and parking
selected on the on-board computer. The steeper

the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-
ing effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat
stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the
DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-
vated and the transmission is in position h, k
or i. You can drive at a higher or a lower speed
than that set on the on-board computer at any
time by accelerating or braking.
Activating DSR
Important safety notes X Press button :.
G WARNING Indicator lamp ; lights up.

The status indicator in the multifunction dis-
If the speed driven and the set speed deviate play shows, e.g. DSR 6 km/h
km/h.
and you activate DSR on a slippery road sur-
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the DSR
face, the wheels may lose traction. There is an symbol appears on the multifunction display.
increased danger of skidding and accidents. You will also see the message: Max. Speed
Before switching DSR on, please take into 30 km/h .
consideration the road surface and the differ- If you enter or exit a parking space using Active
ence between driving speed and the set Parking Assist, and press button :, indicator
speed. lamp ; flashes. DSR can then not be switched
on.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can Deactivating DSR
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override X Press button :.
the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of Indicator lamp ; goes out.
road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only
an aid. You are responsible for the distance to The DSR symbol appears in the multifunction
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for brak- display with the Off message.
ing in good time and for staying in your lane. DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive
You are always responsible for keeping control faster than 22 mph (Canada: 35 km/h). The DSR
of the vehicle and for assessing whether the symbol appears in the multifunction display
downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not along with the Off message. You also hear a
always be able to keep to the set speed, depend- warning tone.
ing on road surface and tire conditions. Select a
set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions
and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.
Further information about "Driving off-road"
(Y page 155).
Driving systems 171
Display in the assistance graphic Off-road program

General notes
i The Off-road program is only available on
vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package.
The off-road program assists you in driving off-
road. The engine's performance characteristics
and the gearshifting characteristics of the auto-
Driving and parking

matic transmission are adapted for this pur-
pose. ABS, ESP® and ETS programs especially
adapted to off-road driving are also activated.
Do not use the off-road program on roads that
are snow-covered or icy or if you have mounted
X Select the Assistance Graphic function snow chains on your vehicle.
using the on-board computer (Y page 198).
When DSR is activated symbol : appears in For information on driving off-road, see
the assistance graphics display. (Y page 155).
To activate/deactivate the off-road pro-

Changing the set speed while the vehi- gram
cle is in motion
X Press DYNAMIC SELECT button :

When DSR is activated, you can change the set (Y page 134) repeatedly until the Off-road
speed to a value between 2 mph and 11 mph drive program is selected.
(Canada: between 4 km/h and 18 km/h) while The status icon of the Off-road program is
the vehicle is in motion. shown in the multifunction display.
X To increase or decrease in 1 mph incre-
ments (Canada: 1 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever to the Display in the assistance graphic
pressure point, up : for a higher set speed or
down ; for a lower set speed.
The set value appears in the status indicator
of the multifunction display.
Z
172 Driving systems
X Select the Assistance Graphic function X Switch on the multimedia system; see the
using the on-board computer (Y page 198). separate multimedia system operating
When the off-road program is activated, sym- instructions.
bol : appears in the assistance graphic dis- X Press button :.
play. The driving dynamics display appears in the
multimedia system display.
Driving dynamics display (vehicles

with the ON&OFFROAD package) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking
General notes Important safety notes

Using the driving dynamics display in the multi- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
media system display, you can see the drive parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area
program you have selected as well as additional around your vehicle using six sensors in the
information on the vehicle's operating status. front bumper and six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between your
vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting a parking space. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the maneu-
vering area while maneuvering and parking in/
leaving parking spaces.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
: Drive program selected objects above or below the sensors, such as
; Accelerator pedal position shown in % flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist
= Brake pedal position shown in % PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
? DSR status indicator when they are in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the
A Angle of inclination
objects.
B Steering angle
The sensors may not detect snow and other
C Uphill or downhill gradient in percentage objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The accelerator and brake pedal position is only Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
available in vehicles with the multimedia system wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or
(COMAND). a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Activating the driving dynamics display Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function
correctly on uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position h, k or
i
Rrelease the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
ted at lower speeds.
Driving systems 173
Range of the sensors Front sensors
General notes Center Approx. 40 in (approx.

100 cm)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located: Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- 60 cm)
mals or objects.
Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging Rear sensors
Driving and parking

loads, tail sections or loading ramps of trucks.
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side evant warning displays light up and a warning
(example) tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch Warning displays
or damage them (Y page 281).
Range
: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
: Detection range of front sensors the headliner in the rear compartment.
; Detection range of rear sensors The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Z
174 Driving systems
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel- Deactivating or activating Parking

low segments showing operational readiness = Assist PARKTRONIC
light up.
The gear lever position or the transmission posi-
tion of the automatic transmission and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Driving and parking
Transmission posi- Warning display

tion
h Front area activated
k, i or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling backwards activated
: Indicator lamp
j No areas activated
; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
One or more segments light up as the vehicle If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi- PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
cle's distance from the obstacle. In addition,
warning tones are issued. i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
When the distance to the obstacle is sufficient, cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
you will hear an intermittent warning tone. The position 2 in the ignition lock.
shorter the distance to the obstacle, the shorter
the frequency of the intermittent warning tones
becomes. When the minimum distance is
reached, you hear a continuous warning tone.
Driving systems 175
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
the Parking Assist vated.
PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop.
hear a warning tone for
Driving and parking

approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
the Parking Assist ference.
PARKTRONIC warning X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 281).
displays are lit. Parking
X Switch the ignition back on.
Assist PARKTRONIC is
then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different
location.
Parking Pilot G WARNING

While parking or pulling out of a parking
General notes
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides result in a collision with another road user.
of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suit- There is a risk of an accident.
able parking space. Active steering intervention
and brake application can assist you during Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
parking and when exiting a parking space. Park- vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
ing Assist PARKTRONIC is also available parking procedure.
(Y page 172).
! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
Important safety notes cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replace- wheels or tires.
ment for your attention to your immediate sur-
roundings. You are always responsible for safe Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suita-
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking ble for parking, e.g.:
space. Make sure that no persons, animals or Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
objects are in the maneuvering range. Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva- Ron unsuitable surfaces
ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
Z
176 Driving systems
Parking tips: Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking spaces parallel or perpendicular to the direction
space as possible. of travel if:
RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown Rthe parking space is on a curb
might be identified or measured incorrectly. Rthe system reads the parking space as being
RParking spaces that are partially occupied by blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
trailer drawbars might not be identified as ing blocks
such or be measured incorrectly. Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
Driving and parking
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking ver into

space being measured inaccurately. Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
RPay attention to the warning messages of e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parking For further information on the detection range
procedure (Y page 173). (Y page 173).
RYou can intervene to correct the steering pro-
cedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be
G WARNING
canceled. If there are objects above the detection range:
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from RParking Pilot may steer in too early
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot.
Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
mounted. objects
RMake sure that the tire pressures are always You may cause a collision as a result. There is
correct. This has a direct influence on the a risk of an accident.
parking characteristics of the vehicle. If objects are located above the detection
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are: range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
tion of travel
Ron straight roads, not bends
Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
Detecting parking spaces

Objects located above the detection range of : Detected parking space on the left
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park- ; Parking symbol
ing space is measured. These are not taken into
= Detected parking space on the right
account when the parking procedure is calcula-
ted, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
loading ramps. Parking Pilot may therefore driving forward. The system is operational at
guide you into the parking space too early. speeds of up to approximately 22 mph
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in (35 km/h). While in operation, the system inde-
spaces perpendicular to the direction of travel if: pendently locates and measures parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next
to one another Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces:
Rthe parking space is directly next to a low Rthat are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
obstacle such as a low curb tion of travel
Ryou forward-park Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Driving systems 177
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and whilst the vehicle is being parked. You are
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi- responsible for braking in good time.
cle X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at bol shows the desired parking space in the
least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle instrument cluster.
i Note that Parking Pilot cannot measure the X Shift the transmission to position k.
length of a parking space if it is at right angles The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
to the direction of travel. You will need to % message appears in the multifunction
display.
Driving and parking

judge whether your vehicle will fit into the
parking space. X To cancel the procedure: press the %
When driving at speeds below 19 mph button on the multifunction steering wheel or
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a pull away.
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When or
a parking space has been detected, an arrow X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a
towards the right or the left also appears. Park- button on the multifunction steering wheel.
ing Pilot only displays parking spaces on the The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
front-passenger side as standard. Parking and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as sage appears in the multifunction display.
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is
activated. When parking on the driver's side, X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
this must remain activated until you confirm the X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button times. When backing up, drive at a speed
on the multifunction steering wheel. The system below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
automatically determines whether the parking erwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately.
space is parallel or at right-angles to the direc- Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
tion of travel. when the vehicle approaches the rear border
A parking space is displayed while you are driv- of the parking space.
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
(15 m) away from it. spaces.
The Parking Pilot Active Select D
Parking Observe Surroundings message appears in
G WARNING X Shift the transmission to position h while
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being the vehicle is stationary.
braked by Parking Pilot, it could roll away if: Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
the voltage supply. and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- sage appears in the multifunction display.
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- i You will achieve the best results by waiting
pered with. for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe battery is disconnected.
pulling away.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicle
times.
occupant. Parking Pilot brakes the vehicle to a standstill
There is a risk of an accident. when the vehicle approaches the front border
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it of the parking space.
against rolling away. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects The Parking Pilot Active Select R
obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically Observe Surroundings message appears in
Z
178 Driving systems
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, i If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC detects

the Parking Pilot Finished message obstacles, Parking Pilot brakes automatically
appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle whilst the vehicle is exiting the parking space.
is now parked. You are responsible for braking in good time.
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver X Start the engine.
having to depress the brake pedal. The braking
X Release the electric parking brake.
effect is canceled when you depress the accel-
erator pedal. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
will drive out of the parking space.
Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steer-
Driving and parking
ing interventions and brake applications. When X Shift the transmission to position h or k.
Parking Pilot is finished, you must steer and The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No:
brake again yourself. Parking Assist % message appears in the multifunction
PARKTRONIC is still available. display.
Parking tips: X To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
pull away.
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
ous factors. These include the position and or
shape of the vehicles parked in front and X To exit a parking space using Parking
behind it and the conditions of the location. It Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you function steering wheel.
too far into a parking space, or not far enough The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate
into it. In some cases, it may also lead you and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
across or onto the curb. If necessary, you sage appears in the multifunction display.
should cancel the parking procedure with X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
Parking Pilot. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
RYou can also preselect transmission position not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
as far into the parking space. Should the ing space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is can-
transmission change take place too early, the celed immediately.
parking procedure is canceled. A sensible X Depending on the message or as required,
parking position can no longer be achieved shift the transmission to position h or k.
from this position. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other
direction. The Parking Pilot Active
Exiting a parking space Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐
roundings message appears in the multi-
In order for Parking Pilot to support you when function display.
exiting the parking space:
i You will achieve the best results by waiting
Ryou need to have parked using Parking Pilot. for the steering procedure to complete before
Rthe border of the parking space must be high pulling away.
enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone If you back up after activation, the steering
is too small, for example. wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
Rthe border of the parking space must not be tion.
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
position as it is maneuvered into the parking plays, several times if necessary.
space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft Once you have exited the parking space com-
(1.0 m) must be available. pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a park- Parking Pilot Finished message appears in
ing space only if you have parked the vehicle the multifunction display. You will then have to
parallel to the direction of travel using Parking steer and merge into traffic on your own. Park-
Pilot. ing Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can
Driving systems 179
take over the steering before the vehicle has Rear view camera
exited the parking space completely. This is
useful, for example when you recognize that it is General notes
already possible to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Parking Pilot

X Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Driving and parking

Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The
Parking Pilot Canceled message appears
in the multifunction display.
or
X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 174).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.
The Parking Pilot Canceled message Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
appears in the multifunction display. maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when: vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem display.
Rthe electric parking brake is engaged
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
Rtransmission position j is selected mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer pos- Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 281).
sible
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) i The text shown in the multimedia system
display depends on the language setting. The
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In
following are examples of rear view camera
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in messages in the multimedia system display.
the instrument cluster
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis- Important safety notes
appears and the multifunction display shows the
Parking Pilot Canceled message. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer replacement for your attention to your immedi-
and brake again yourself. ate surroundings. You are always responsible
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the that there are no persons, animals or objects in
accelerator again. the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
Rif the tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
Z
180 Driving systems
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.

Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 281)
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
Driving and parking
license plate holder, rear bicycle rack).
Activating/deactivating the rear view

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
camera imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is vehicle
in position 2 in the ignition lock. ; White guide line without steering input –
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
function is selected in the multimedia system; (static)
see the Digital Operator's Manual. = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
X Engage reverse gear. including the exterior mirrors, for current
The area behind the vehicle is shown with steering wheel angle (dynamic)
guide lines in the multimedia system display. ? Yellow lane marking the course the tires will
The image from the rear view camera is avail- take at the current steering wheel angle
able throughout the maneuvering process. (dynamic)
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to j or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Messages in the multimedia system dis-

play
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
Runder the rear bumper imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate cle
handle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.: D Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Driving systems 181
= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
? Red guide line at a distance of approximately
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 180).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
Driving and parking

X With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
: Front warning display X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
; Additional measurement operational readi- back up until you reach the end position.
ness indicator for Parking Assist Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
PARKTRONIC parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
= Rear warning display
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera- Reverse perpendicular parking with steer-
tional (Y page 173), additional measurement ing input
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system display. If the Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active
or light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multi-
media system display.
"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space
without steering input
: Parking space marking

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 180).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
: White guide line without steering input – steering wheel in the direction of the parking
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
(static) ing space marking :.
; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width X Maintain the steering input and reverse care-
including the exterior mirrors, for current fully.
Z
182 Driving systems
X Back up carefully until you have reached the

final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
Wide-angle function
Driving and parking
: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for current
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
: Symbol for the wide-angle view function
; Your vehicle
= Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis-
plays
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
360° camera
: White guide line for current steering input General notes
; Parking space marking The 360° camera is a system consisting of four
X Turn the steering wheel to the center position cameras.
while the vehicle is stationary. The system processes images from the follow-
ing cameras:
RRear view camera
RFront camera
RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
The cameras cover the immediate surroundings
of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g.
when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit.
The 360° camera images can be shown in full
screen mode or in seven different split-screen
views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This
view is calculated from the data supplied by the
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately installed cameras (virtual camera).
The 360° camera images can be shown in full
; White guide line without steering input
screen mode or in six different split-screen
= End of parking space views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
Driving systems 183
view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.
view is calculated from the data supplied by the You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-
installed cameras (virtual camera). ers.
The seven split-screen views are: The 360° camera will not function or will func-
The six split-screen views are: tion in a limited manner:
RTop view and picture from the rear view cam- Rif the doors are open
era (130° viewing angle) Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in
RTop view and picture from the front camera Rif the tailgate is open
Driving and parking

(without displaying the maximum steering Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
wheel angle)
Rat night or in very dark places
RTop view and enlarged rear view
Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light
RTop view and enlarged front view
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
RTop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer
lighting (the display may flicker)
tow hitch)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
RTop view and rear-view images from the exte-
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
rior mirror cameras (rear wheel view) ter
RTop view and forward-view images from the
Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered
exterior mirror cameras (front wheel view)
Rif the vehicle components in which the cam-
i The top view and trailer view are available eras are installed are damaged. In this event,
for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow hitch. have the camera position and setting checked
When the function is active and you shift the at a qualified specialist workshop
transmission from position 7 or C to Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
A, you see the previous view in the COMAND can otherwise injure others or cause damage to
display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden. objects or the vehicle.
When you shift between transmission positions
7 and C, you see the previously selected Activation conditions
front or rear view.
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
Important safety notes Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a COMAND operating instructions
replacement for your attention to your immedi- Rthe 360° Camera function is activated
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in Activating the 360° camera using the
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and SYS button
parking in parking spaces.
X Press and hold the W button for longer
The 360° camera may show a distorted view of than 2 seconds, see the separate COMAND
obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. It operating instructions.
cannot show objects in the following areas: The following appears depending on whether
Runder the front bumper gear h or k is selected:
Rvery close to the front bumper Rfull screen display with the image from the
Rvery close to the rear bumper front camera
Runder the rear bumper Rfull screen display with the image from the
Rin close range above the handle on the trunk rear view camera
lid
Rvery close to the exterior mirrors
You are always responsible for safety, and must
always pay attention to your surroundings when
parking and maneuvering. This applies to the
Z
184 Driving systems
Activating the 360° camera with ATTENTION ASSIST

COMAND
General notes
X Press the W button, see the separate
COMAND operating instructions. ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
controller and press W to confirm. active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
X Select 360° Camera and press W to confirm.
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
The following appears depending on whether
Driving and parking
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the

gear h or k is selected:
driver, it suggests taking a break.
Ra split screen with top view and the image
from the front camera or
Ra split screen with top view and the image
from the rear view camera ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It
For further information about the COMAND con- might not always recognize fatigue or increasing
troller, see the separate COMAND operating inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them
instructions. at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-
rested and attentive driver.
Activating the 360° camera using The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
reverse gear occur at all:
The 360° camera images can be automatically Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-
displayed by engaging reverse gear. imately 30 minutes
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
in the ignition lock. is uneven or if there are potholes
X Make sure that the Activation by R gear Rif there is a strong side wind
setting is active in COMAND, see the separate Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with
COMAND operating instructions. high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
X To show the 360° camera image: engage eration
reverse gear. Rif you are predominantly driving slower than
The COMAND display shows the area behind 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
the vehicle in split screen: (200 km/h)
Rvehicle with guide lines Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rtop view of the vehicle Rin active driving situations, such as when you
change lanes or change your speed
Information in the Digital Operator's ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue
Manual your journey and starts assessing your tiredness
again if:
In the Digital Operator's Manual you will find Ryou switch off the engine
information on the following topics:
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv-
RDisplays in the COMAND display er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
RDisplay with the PARKTRONIC display take a break
Exiting 360° camera display mode

As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of
19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activated,
the function switches off. The COMAND display
switches back to the previously selected view.
You can also switch the display by selecting the
& symbol in the display and pressing W the
COMAND controller to confirm.
Driving systems 185
Displaying the attention level responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display

If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a
Break!
Break!.
Driving and parking

In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X If necessary, take a break.
X Confirm the message by pressing the a
You can have current status information dis- button on the steering wheel.
played in the assistance menu (Y page 197) of
the on-board computer. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
X Select the Assistance display for Attention
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do
not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still
Assist using the on-board computer
detects increasing lapses in concentration, you
(Y page 198).
will be warned again after 15 minutes at the
The following information is displayed: earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN-
RThe length of the journey since the last break. TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration.
RThe Attention Level determined by ATTEN-
TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
levels from high to low. tem: if a warning is output in the multifunction
RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
display, a service station search is performed in
the multimedia system. You can select a service
the attention level and cannot output a warn-
station and navigation to this service station will
ing, the System Suspended message
then begin. This function can be activated or
appears. The bar display then changes the
deactivated in the multimedia system; see the
display, such as when you are driving at a
Digital Operator's Manual.
speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above
125 mph (200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST Lane Tracking package
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- General notes

board computer (Y page 199). The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
The system determines the attention level of Spot Assist (Y page 185) and Lane Keeping
the driver depending on the setting selected: Assist (Y page 187).
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is set Blind Spot Assist
to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set General notes
higher. The attention level detected by Attention
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either
Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is
side of the vehicle that are not visible to the
warned earlier.
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis- draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
play in the assistance graphic display. monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, responding turn signal to change lane, you will
it is automatically reactivated after the engine also receive an optical and audible warning.
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-
Z
186 Driving systems
Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of Monitoring range of the sensors
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
Important safety notes impaired if:
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else
G WARNING covering the sensors
Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, rain or snow
placing them in the blind spot area Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
Driving and parking
motorbike or bicycle
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
Rthe road has very wide lanes
differential and overtake your vehicle
Rthe road has narrow lanes
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries
an accident.
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
Always observe the traffic conditions care- indicated.
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to it.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
sufficient distance to the side for other road ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
users and obstacles. case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side
i USA only: of their lane.
This device has been approved by the FCC as Due to the nature of the system:
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving
is intended for use in an automotive radar close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
system only. Removing, tampering with, or borders.
altering the device will void any warranties, Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam- driving alongside particularly long vehicles,
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved such as trucks, for a prolonged time.
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device Warning display
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to the
bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
: Warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
Driving systems 187
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-
goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. era : which is attached behind the top of the
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph markings on the road and can warn you before
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond- you leave your lane unintentionally.
ing side lights up red. This warning is always This function is available in the range between
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
monitoring range from behind or from the side. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
Driving and parking

When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
occurs if the difference in speed is less than intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
7 mph (12 km/h). up to 1.5 seconds.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist Important safety notes
is no longer active. G WARNING
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
is adjusted automatically according to the ambi- Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly
ent light. detect lane markings.
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
Collision warning
Rgive an unnecessary warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre- Rnot give a warning
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone There is a risk of an accident.
sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, vehicles detected are indica- Always pay particular attention to the traffic
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :. situation and keep within the lane, especially
There are no further warning tones. if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist G WARNING
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated
in the on-board computer (Y page 199). The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
tion lock. a risk of an accident.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light You should always steer, brake or accelerate
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
then turn yellow. ing Assist.
Lane Keeping Assist If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
General notes dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-
cle in the lane.
Z
188 Driving systems
The system may be impaired or may not function Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
if: obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, In order that you are warned only when neces-
fog or spray sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the ing, the system detects certain conditions and
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if warns you accordingly.
the road surface is wet) The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Driving and parking
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- bend
ity of the camera Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway
Rthere are no or several unclear lane markings
Rthe system detects solid lane markings
for one lane, e.g. roadworks
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short Ryou cut the corner on a bend
and thus the lane markings cannot be detec-
ted
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on
the roadway
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 187).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphic are shown
in green (Y page 198). Lane Keeping Assist is
ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
tain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
tain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Displays and operation 189
Important safety notes The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted using the brightness control knob.
G WARNING The brightness control knob is located on the
On-board computer and displays

If you operate information systems and com- bottom left of the instrument cluster
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- (Y page 32).
cle when driving, you may be distracted from X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- counter-clockwise.
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or
dent. L position, the brightness is dependent
upon the brightness of the ambient light.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Speedometer with segments
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. The speedometer is divided into segments on
vehicles with Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
You must observe the legal requirements for the The segments in the speedometer indicate
country in which you are currently driving when which speed range is available.
operating the on-board computer. RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated
G WARNING (Y page 160):
One or two segments in the set speed range
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
light up.
functioned, you may not recognize function
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The front moving more slowly than the stored
operating safety of your vehicle may be speed:
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. The segments between the speed of the vehi-
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked cle in front and the stored speed light up.
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
Tachometer
The on-board computer only shows messages or
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
tion display. You should therefore make sure could damage the engine.
your vehicle is operating safely at all times. The red band in the tachometer indicates the
If the operating safety of your vehicle is engine's overrevving range.
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. The engine is limited within a range to protect
Contact a qualified specialist workshop. the engine when the red band is reached.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (Y page 32).
Outside temperature display
Displays and operation You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
Instrument cluster lighting point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
The light sensor in the instrument cluster auto- play indicates the temperature measured and
matically controls the brightness of the multi- does not record the road temperature.
function display. In daylight, the displays in the The outside temperature display is in the multi-
instrument cluster are not illuminated. function display (Y page 192).
Z
190 Displays and operation
There is a short delay before a change in outside ! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature appears in the multifunction dis- temperature is too high.
play. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine
will otherwise be damaged.

Coolant temperature gauge The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-
ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32).
G WARNING
The H marking in the coolant temperature gauge
Opening the hood when the engine is over- corresponds to a coolant temperature of
heated or when there is a fire in the engine approximately 248 ‡ (120 †).
compartment could expose you to hot gases Under normal operating conditions and at the
or other service products. There is a risk of correct coolant level, the coolant temperature
injury. gauge may rise to the H marking.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
Operating the on-board computer

Overview
: Multifunction display
; Right control panel
= Left control panel
X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Displays and operation 191
Left control panel
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar

;

9 Press briefly:
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list
or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name
or telephone number
9 Press and hold:
: RIn the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired fre-
quency range, or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open
a RConfirms the selection or display message

RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts
dialing the selected number
% Press briefly:
RBack
RVehicles with Audio 20: switches off voice-operated control for navigation
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND: switches off the Voice Control System (see the sep-
arate operating instructions)
RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used
RExits the telephone book/redial memory
% Press and hold:

RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu
Right control panel
ó RVehicles with Audio 20:

Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions)
RVehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instruc-
tions)
8 RMute
WX RAdjusts the volume
Z
192 Menus and submenus
~ RRejects or ends a call

RExits the telephone book/redial memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
Multifunction display RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 158)

Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 132)
Rë HOLD function (Y page 166)
RDSR Downhill Speed Regulation
(Y page 170)
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer (Y page 190).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip menu (Y page 193)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 194)
: Permanent display: outside temperature or
RAudio menu (Y page 195)
speed (Y page 200)
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 196)
; Time
= Text field RDriveAssist menu (assistance)
? Menu bar (Y page 197)

RServ. menu (Y page 199)
A Drive program (Y page 136)
RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 199)
B Transmission position (Y page 138)
RAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in the (Y page 201)
lower and upper part of the multifunction display
differ from the displays shown here. The displays for the Audio
Audio, Navi and Tel menus
may differ slightly from those in your vehicle.
X To display menu bar ?: press the =
The examples given in this Operator's Manual
or ; button on the steering wheel.
apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or sub-
menu as well as display messages.
i Set the time using the multimedia system
(see the separate operating instructions).
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
RZGearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 142)
Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 175)
Menus and submenus 193
Trip menu ECO display
Standard display The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-

AMG vehicles.

X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
DISPLAY
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
X Press and hold the % button on the steer- For more information on the ECO display, see
ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom- (Y page 151).
eter : and odometer ; appears.
Displaying the range and current fuel
Trip computer "From Start" or "From consumption
Reset"
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only shows

: Distance range :.
; Driving time X Press the = or ; button on the steering
= Average speed wheel to select the Trip menu.
? Average fuel consumption X Press 9 or : to select the display with
X Press the = or ; button on the steering approximate range : and current fuel con-
wheel to select the Trip menu. sumption ;.
Approximate range : that can be covered is
X Press the 9 or : button to select
calculated according to your current driving
From Start or From Reset.
Reset style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If
The values in the From Start submenu are cal- there is only a small amount of fuel left in the
culated from the start of a journey whilst the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C
values in the From Reset submenu are calcu- appears instead of approximate range :.
lated from the last time the submenu was reset Recuperation display = shows you if energy
(Y page 194). has been recuperated from the kinetic energy
In the following cases, the trip computer is auto- in overrun mode and saved in the battery.
matically reset From Start:
Start Recuperation display = depends on the
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more engine installed and is therefore not available
than four hours. in all vehicles.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset.
Reset
Z
Digital speedometer Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.

You can find further information on navigation in
the separate multimedia system operating
instructions.
X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-
rate operating instructions).
wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
wheel to select the Navi menu.
digital speedometer ;.
A gear shift recommendation : Z can also
follow. Route guidance not active
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation : when shifting manually
(Y page 142).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-
mendation is shown in the status bar of the
multifunction display and not in the digital
speedometer display.
Resetting values : Direction of travel

; Current road
wheel to select the Trip menu. Route guidance active
function that you wish to reset. No change of direction announced
X Press a to confirm.
X Press : to select Yes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer : Distance to destination
RECO display ; Distance to the next change of direction
If you reset the values in the ECO display, the = Current road
values in the "From Start" trip computer are also ? "Follow the road's course" symbol
reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start"
trip computer, the values in the ECO display are
also reset.
Change of direction without lane recom- Other status indicators of the naviga-
mendation tion system

: Road into which the change of direction
The navigation system displays additional infor-
leads mation and the vehicle status.
; Distance to change of direction and visual
Possible displays:
distance display
= Change-of-direction symbol RNew Route... or Calculating Route
When a change of direction is to be made, you A new route is calculated.
will see symbol = for the change of direction RRoad Not Mapped
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator The vehicle position is inside the area of the
shortens towards the top of the display as you digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
approach the point of the announced change of newly built streets, car parks or private land.
direction. The change of direction starts once RNo Route
the distance display reaches zero. No route could be calculated to the selected
Change of direction announced with a destination.
RO
lane recommendation
You have reached the destination or an inter-
mediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
: Road into which the change of direction

leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Lanes not recommended
? Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A Change-of-direction symbol : Active station list
; Station frequency with memory position
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction The multifunction display shows station ; with
if the digital map supports this data. During the station frequency or station name. The preset
change of direction, new lanes may be added. position is only displayed along with station ; if
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able this has been stored.
to complete the next change of direction if you X Switch on the multimedia system and select
stay in this lane. Radio (see the separate operating instruc-
Recommended lane and new lane during a tions).
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be X Press the = or ; button on the steering
able to complete the next two changes of direc- wheel to select the Audio menu.
tion without changing lane.
Z
X To select a preset list or station list: press Video DVD operation

and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired
frequency range is shown.
X To select a station: briefly press 9

or :.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
You can find further information on operation
in the "Satellite radio" section of the separate You can only operate DVD videos in the Audio
multimedia system operating instructions. menu in vehicles with COMAND.
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD
Operating an audio player or audio (see the separate operating instructions).

media
wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene :
appears.
: Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or media Telephone menu
can be played, depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle. Introduction
X Switch on the multimedia system and then G WARNING
audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate
If you operate information systems and com-
operating instructions).
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
wheel to select the Audio menu. cle when driving, you may be distracted from
X To select the next/previous track: briefly
the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
press the 9 or : button. trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
X To select a track from the track list (rapid
dent.
scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : Only operate this equipment when the traffic
button until desired track appears. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
drives or data carriers support this function. ment when the vehicle is stationary.
If track information is stored on the audio device
or medium, the multifunction display will show When telephoning, you must observe the legal
the number and title of the track. requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer’s operating instructions).
X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-
rate operating instructions).
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul- X If there is more than one number for a
timedia system; see the separate operating particular name: press the 6 or a
instructions. button to display the numbers.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the 9 or : button to select the

wheel to select the Tel menu. number you want to dial.
You will see one of the following display mes- X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
sages in the multifunction display: or
RTelephone READY or the name of the net- X If you do not want to make a call: press the
work provider: the mobile phone has found a ~ or % button.
network and is ready to receive.
RTelephone No service
service: there is no network Redialing
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network. The on-board computer saves the last names or
numbers dialed in the redial memory.
Accepting a call X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel menu.
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
menu, a display message appears in the multi- memory.
function display.
You can accept a call at any time, even if you are desired name or number.
not in the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
or
to accept an incoming call.
X If you do not want to make the call: press
the ~ or % button.
Rejecting or ending a call
You can end or reject a call anytime, even if you
are not in the Tel menu. Assistance menu
X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call. Introduction
Selecting an entry in the phone book vehicle, you have the following options in the
DriveAssist menu:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering RDisplaying the assistance graphic
wheel to select the Tel menu. (Y page 198)
X Press the 9, : or a button to
RDeactivating/activating ESP® (except
switch to the phone book.
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 198)
X Authorize access to the phone book on the
RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
phone.
(Y page 198)
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
desired name.
(Y page 199)
or RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the (Y page 199)
9 or : button for longer than one sec- RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
ond. (Y page 199)
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored for
a name: press the 6 or a button to
start dialing.
or
Z
Displaying the assistance graphic It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-
ing situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel

Deactivating/activating ESP® in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles (Y page 65).
For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 63).
X Start the engine.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press 9 or : to select ESP. ESP
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press a to confirm.
X Press 9 or : to select Assist. The current selection appears.
Graphic.
Graphic X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
X Press a to confirm. ton again.
The multifunction display shows the Distance ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
Pilot DISTRONIC distance display in the assis- in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
tance graphic display. ously when the engine is running.
The assistance graphic displays the status of If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up
and information from the following driving continuously, ESP® is not available due to a mal-
systems or driving safety systems: function.
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC (Y page 160)
Observe the information on warning lamps
RActive Brake Assist (Y page 61) (Y page 235).
RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 184) Observe the information on display messages
RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 187) (Y page 205).
RDSR (Y page 170)
ROff-road program (Y page 171) Activating/deactivating Active Brake
RRear window wiper (Y page 113) Assist
X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the = or ; button on the steering
assessment. wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
Deactivating/activating ESP® Brake Assist.
Assist
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® The current selection appears.
(Y page 63). X To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
G WARNING ton again.
When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- æ symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk play in the assistance graphic display.
of skidding and an accident. Further information on Active Brake Assist
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- (Y page 61).
bed in the following.
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION Service menu

ASSIST
X Press the = or ; button on the steering vehicle, you have the following options in the
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Serv. menu:

X Press the 9 or : button to select RCalling up display messages in message
Attention Assist.
Assist memory (Y page 204)
X Press a to confirm. RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
The current selection appears. tem (Canada only) (Y page 309)
X Press a to confirm. RChecking the tire pressure electronically
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Off (USA only) (Y page 309)
Standard or Sensitive.
Sensitive RCalling up the service due date
X Press the a button to save the setting. (Y page 277)
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistance graphics display. Settings menu
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 184). Introduction
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot vehicle, you have the following options in the
Assist Sett. menu:
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
RChanging the light settings
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
RChanging the vehicle settings
Blind Spot Assist
Assist. RChanging the convenience settings
X Press a to confirm. RRestoring the factory settings
The current selection appears.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- Instrument cluster
ton again.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
Selecting the distance unit
see (Y page 185). The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-
tifunction display.
Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the 9 or : button to select Instrument Cluster submenu.
Assist.
Lane Keeping Assist X Press a to confirm.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
The current selection appears. Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function.
X Press a again to confirm. You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
miles
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, Off X Press the a button to save the setting.
Standard or Adaptive
Adaptive. The selected unit of measurement for distance
X Press the a button to save the setting. applies to:
When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
RDigitalspeedometer in the Trip menu
multifunction display shows the lane mark-
ings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. ROdometer and the trip odometer
RTrip computer
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (Y page 187).
Z
RCurrent fuel consumption and approximate Lights

range
RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu Switching the daytime running lamps on/
RCruise control off
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC This function is not available in Canada.

RASSYST PLUS service interval display X Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett. menu.
Switching the additional speedometer X Press the : or 9 button to select the
on/off Light submenu.
If the additional speedometer is switched on, X Press a to confirm.
the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul- X Press the : or 9 button to select the
tifunction display instead of the outside tem- Daytime Running Lights function.
perature. If the Daytime Running Lights function has
The speed display is inverse to the speedome- been switched on, the multifunction display
ter. shows the cone of light and the W symbol
X Press the = or ; button on the steering in orange.
wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Further information on daytime running lamps
Instrument Cluster submenu. (Y page 105).
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle
Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer
[mph] function. Activating/deactivating the automatic
You will see the selected setting: On or Off
Off. door locking mechanism
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Selecting permanent display wheel to select the Sett. menu.
The Permanent Display: function allows you Vehicle submenu.
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the X Press a to confirm.
speed. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
The speed display is inverse to the speedome- Automatic Door Lock function.
ter. If the Automatic Door Lock function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the doors in orange.
Instr. Cluster submenu. If you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-
tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
Permanent Display: function. For further information on the automatic locking
The current setting, Outside Temperature feature, see (Y page 76).
or Speedometer [km/h]
[km/h]/Speedometer
Speedometer Activating/deactivating the acoustic
[mph]
[mph], appears.
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-
cle.
Vehicle submenu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Yes.
Yes
Acoustic Lock function. X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, tion.

the multifunction display shows the & If you have selected Yes,
Yes the multifunction
symbol in orange. display shows a confirmation message.
X Press the a button to save the setting. For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Light submenu is only
Comfort reset if the vehicle is stationary.
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-

ing feature on/off AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
This function is only available in Canada. Warm-up
This function is only available when the vehicle is
equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when
the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle
and then open the driver's or front-passenger
door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior : Digital speedometer
mirrors using the button on the door
; Gear indicator
(Y page 101), they will not fold out automati-
cally. The exterior mirrors can then only be fol- = Upshift indicator
ded out using the button on the door. ? Engine oil temperature
X Press the = or ; button on the steering A Coolant temperature
wheel to select the Sett. menu. B Transmission fluid temperature
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steering
Convenience submenu. wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press a to confirm. Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP =
X Press the : or 9 button to select the indicates that the engine has reached the
Auto. Mirror Folding function. overrevving range when in the manual drive
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is program.
switched on, the multifunction display shows Engine and transmission oil temperature:
the exterior mirror in orange. when the engine and transmission are at nor-
X Press the a button to save the setting. mal operating temperature, oil tempera-
ture ? and B are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
Restoring the factory settings If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
X Press the = or ; button on the steering ature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
wheel to select the Sett. menu. transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
Factory Setting submenu.
The Reset All Settings? function
appears.
Z
SETUP You can start the RACE TIMER when the engine
is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG menu.

X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACE TIMER appears.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACE TIMER.
: Drive system Comfort/Sport
Comfort Sport/Sport
Sport +
; Chassis Comfort/Sport
Comfort Sport/Sport
Sport + Displaying the intermediate time
= Transmission D/M M
? ESP® OnOn/Off
Off or SPORT handling mode
Sport
SETUP displays the following information and
functions:
Rthe digital speedometer
Rthe gear indicator
Rthe drive system setting X Press the = or ; button to select
Rthe suspension mode Time
Interm. Time.
Rthe transmission position X Press a to confirm.
Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status The intermediate time appears for five sec-
onds.
wheel to select the AMG menu. Starting a new lap
X Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACE TIMER
: RACE TIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
= Lap
X Lap.
Press a to confirm New Lap
: Lap i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
; RACE TIMER laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a Finish Lap
Lap.
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on Stopping the RACE TIMER
public roads.
X Press the % button on the steering wheel. = Average speed

X Confirm Yes with a. ? Distance covered
The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop the A Maximum speed
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in This function is shown if you have stored at least

the ignition lock. If you turn the SmartKey to one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
position 3 and then press a Start to con-
firm, timing is continued.
wheel to select the AMG menu.
Resetting the current lap X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
X Stop the RACE TIMER. overall evaluation appears.
X Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap.
Lap Lap statistics
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is ? Lap length
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are A Top speed during lap
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you This function is only available if you have stored
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
have to be reset. TIMER.
X Reset the current lap. X Press the = or ; button on the steering
X Press a to confirm ResetReset. wheel to select the AMG menu.
Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi- X Press 9 repeatedly until a lap evaluation
function display. appears.
X Press the : button to select Yes and press
Each lap appears in a separate submenu. The
the a button to confirm. fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
All laps are deleted. X Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
Overall statistics
: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
Z
204 Display messages
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 166)
RParking (Y page 147)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages,
Messages for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
Messages
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 205
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic
Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist are tempo-
Currently Unavaila‐ rarily unavailable.
ble See Operator's Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Manual
In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making
slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
!÷ ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not avail-
able due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Operator's Manual
The !, ÷, å and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
Z
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Currently Unavaila‐ Active Brake Assist may have also failed.

ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
to a malfunction.
Currently Unavaila‐ Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
ble See Operator's
Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in the
instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD
function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
÷

Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Inoperative See A warning tone sounds.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps may light up in
the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
only) ! (Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition
only) was switched off.
Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
tion to Release the X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.
Parking Brake
F (USA The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the
only) ! (Canada electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 149).
only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually.
ing Brake
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 87).
F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.

The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
only) ! (Canada To apply:
only) X Switch the ignition off.
Parking Brake See X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
Operator's Manual
X Shift the transmission to position B.
Z

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp light up.

To release:
X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
or
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 148).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
X Do not drive on.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes

and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
To release:
X Release the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinues to flash:
X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 324).
X Turn the front wheels towards the curb.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds

after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
goes out or remains lit.
X Apply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:

X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 148).
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply
the electric parking brake manually.
X Shift the transmission to position B, as the electric parking
brake is not applied automatically.
F (USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds
only) ! (Canada after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then
only) goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-
Parking Brake Inop‐
voltage or undervoltage.
erative
X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
X Engage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied:

Z

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.

$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
A warning tone sounds. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.

Inoperative
Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Functions Currently Possible causes are:
Limited See Opera‐
RThe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
tor's Manual
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Active Brake Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Restart the engine.
Active Brake Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. Situation-

Assist: System Inop‐ dependent braking assistance may also have failed.
erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Radar Sensors Dirty The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:

ual
RDirt on sensors
RHeavy rain or snow
RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
RActive Brake Assist
RDistance Pilot DISTRONIC
A warning tone also sounds.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and
drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis-
appears.
X Clean all sensors (Y page 281).
The display message disappears.
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also

lights up in the instrument cluster.
SRS Malfunction Ser‐
vice Required G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 39).
6 The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right.

The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service G WARNING
Required or Front The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
Z
6 The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning.

Rear Left Malfunc‐

tion Service G WARNING
Required or Rear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.

Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required or The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
Right Side Curtain tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
Airbag Malfunction There is an increased risk of injury.
Service Required

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deac-
bag Disabled See tivated during the journey, although:

Operator's Manual Ran adult
or
Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may
not be triggered in the event of an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat get out of the vehi-
cle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has deactivated the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(Y page 47)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-
tifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 47).
Z

Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled
bag Enabled See during the journey, even though:
Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may
be triggered unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system might otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and front-
passenger knee bag (Y page 47)
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-
tifunction display
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occu-
pant.

If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see
(Y page 47).
Lights
i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:
The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp
have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Check Left Corner‐ (Y page 109).
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering or
Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low Beam (Y page 109).
or Check Right Low
Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left (Y page 109).
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Front Left (Y page 109).
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right or
Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defec-

tive.
Check Left Mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
Z
b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Brake (Y page 109).

Lamp or Check Right
Brake Lamp or
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
X
Check Left High Beam (Y page 109).
or Check Right
High Beam or
b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.

License Plate Lamp
b The left or right-hand fog lamp is faulty.

Check Left Fog Lamp
or Check Right Fog
Lamp
b The rear fog lamp is faulty.

Rear Fog Lamp (Y page 109).
or
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left (Y page 109).
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right or
Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light (Y page 109).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check Right
Tail Lamp
b The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.


Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.

Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime (Y page 109).
Running Light or
Check Right Daytime or
Running Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning
tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
b You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off.

X Turn the light switch to the L or Ã position.
Switch On Headlamps
Z
Engine
+
The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant Level ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 276).
If you have to add coolant frequently:
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling
system checked.
? The fan motor is malfunctioning.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant is too hot.

Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increases again:

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
# The battery is not being charged.


See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are:
ual
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

# The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is

too low.
Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds.
Operator's Manual
X Observe the instructions in the display message # See Oper‐
ator's Manual
Manual.
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 274).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 275).
If the engine oil needs topping up more often:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine
checked.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
æ The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
Z
ç There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
æ The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
Gas Cap Loose
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems
À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or

a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.

Inoperative
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 167).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 167).

Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:

ble See Operator's
RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Manual
RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or
snow
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.

Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are:
ble See Operator's
Manual
RThe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is faulty.

Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
Parking Pilot Can‐ The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
celed tened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
Z

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while
steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-

tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 175).
Parking Pilot Inop‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-
erative vers.
Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately ten
minutes (Y page 175).
X Switch off and restart the engine.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.

Parking Pilot Fin‐ The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
ished The display message disappears automatically.
Distance Pilot Off Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated (Y page 164).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
Distance Pilot Now Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again after having been tem-
Available porarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC (Y page 162).
Distance Pilot Cur‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is temporarily inoperative.
rently Unavailable Possible causes are:
See Operator's Man‐
ual
RThe system is outside the operating temperature range.
RThe on-board voltage is too low.
disappears.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is operational again.

Distance Pilot Inop‐ Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Situation-dependent
erative braking assistance may also have failed.

Distance Pilot Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
pended is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
Distance Pilot A condition for activating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC has not been met.
- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
(Y page 162).
Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning.

erative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control RA condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for exam-
ple.
RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
or
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 159).
or
X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 198).
Z
Tires
Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
Possible causes:
Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires
Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped
G WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (Y page 287).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 309).
Check Tire Pressure Canada only:

Then Restart Run The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
Flat Indicator and has not been restarted since.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 309).
Run Flat Indicator Canada only:

Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Please Correct Tire USA only:

Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 309).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 312).

Check Tires USA only:
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The

wheel position appears in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
tire (Y page 287).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 309).
Warning Tire Mal‐ USA only:

function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position appears in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire
tire (Y page 287).
Tire Press. Monitor USA only:

Currently Unavaila‐ Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
ble signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
Z

TirePress. Sen‐ USA only:
sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires.
The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multifunction
display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Tire Pressure Moni‐ USA only:

tor Inoperative No The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
Wheel Sensors tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor USA only:

Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
Vehicle
Depress Brake to You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
Start Engine tion N without depressing the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N, You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D with-

Depress Brake and out starting the engine.
Start Engine X Start the engine.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the

desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the
parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal,
the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock
remains engaged.
i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you can
only shift out of position P into another transmission position when
the engine is running.
Apply Brake to You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R, N or D
Shift from 'P' without depressing the brake pedal.

Transmission Not in The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
P Risk of Vehicle position R, N or D.

Rolling Away A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Close the driver's door completely.
Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
tionary attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
To Engage Trans‐ You have attempted to shift from position D or N to transmission

miss. Position R position R.
First Depress the X Shift the transmission to position R while depressing the brake
Brake pedal.
Reversing Not Possi‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back up.
ble Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐ The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.

function Stop X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Z

Stop Vehicle Shift The automatic transmission has overheated.
to P Leave Engine X Drive on carefully.
Running The automatic transmission is available again when the display

message goes out.
X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the dis-
play message has disappeared.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being
Malfunction charged.
X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off
the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Trans. Oil Overhea‐ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the transmission oil has overheated.
ted Drive on with Manual drive program M and the temporarily active manual drive pro-
Care gram are no longer available. The engine power output is reduced.
X Allow the vehicle to cool down.
4matic Currently 4MATIC has overheated. The vehicle is only driven by the front wheels.
Unavailable X Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC more quickly.
When the display message goes out, 4MATIC is available again and
the vehicle is driven by all four wheels.
4matic Inoperative 4MATIC is malfunctioning. The vehicle is only driven by the front
wheels.
A The tailgate is open

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-
rior if the tailgate is open.
X Close the tailgate.
? The hood is open.


G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐ G WARNING
tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
If you are able to steer safely:

If you are unable to steer safely:
X Do not drive on.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver

range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 276).
Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.

ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty.

Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tioning
Z
SmartKey
Â
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

A warning tone sounds
Take Your Key from
X Remove the SmartKey.
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Â The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Change the battery (Y page 72).
Replace Key Battery
Â The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is

only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The
Key SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
(red display message) trally or start the engine.
X Locate the SmartKey.
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the

SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 231
Â The SmartKey is currently undetected.

X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected
(white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The SmartKey is continually undetected.

The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is
Remove 'Start' But‐ faulty. A warning tone also sounds.
ton and Insert Key
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.
These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting
the engine or whilst driving.
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/ N Signal type
indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
lamp
ü N After engine start, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).
ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
The warning tone ceases.
Z
232 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

lamp
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Safety systems

lamp
é N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The brake system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The braking characteristics may be affected.
X Drive on taking extra care.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
Z

lamp
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore,
BAS (Brake Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also deactivated.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, EBD
(electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD function and hill start assist, for
example, are also deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:

lamp

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone
also sounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, the HOLD
function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
G WARNING
ple.
! N $(USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow
÷å ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
$J ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the
HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
G WARNING
ple.
Z

lamp
÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at
least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 65) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 63).
å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a
wheel starts to spin.
G WARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
X Reactivate ESP®.
In rare cases (Y page 65) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 63).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.
M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:

The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP®" section (Y page 65).

lamp

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hill start assist are not
available due to a malfunction.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
Z

lamp
!F N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake lights up.
6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 39).
Engine
lamp
; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

lamp

æ N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Z

lamp
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 276).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
to road and traffic conditions.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page 276).
X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.

lamp
X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified

specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
lamp
· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too
high a speed.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(Y page 61).
Z
Tires
lamp
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G WARNING
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(Y page 287).
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 309).
h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)

flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
Function restrictions 243
General notes Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manual describes the basic principles for Please always use this feature instead of con-
operation. More information can be found in the sulting the map display for directions. Looking
Digital Operator's Manual. at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
Important safety notes This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
G WARNING Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
If you operate information systems and com- This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
Multimedia system
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
the traffic situation. You could also lose con- of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- radiation source and a person's body (not
dent. including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
Only operate this equipment when the traffic legs).
situation permits. If you are not sure that this G WARNING
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Modifications to electronic components, their
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- software as well as wiring can impair their
ment when the vehicle is stationary. function and/or the function of other net-
You must observe the legal requirements for the worked components. In particular, systems
country in which you are currently driving when relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
operating the multimedia system. result, these may no longer function as inten-
The multimedia system calculates the route to ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the destination without taking the following into the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
account, for example: accident and injury.
Rtraffic lights Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
Rstop and yield signs tronic components or their software. You
Rparking or stopping restrictions should have all work to electrical and elec-
Rroad narrowing tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations specialist workshop.
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the Function restrictions
digital map's data.
For example: For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
Ra diverted route ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way You will notice this, for example, because either
street has been changed you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Z
244 Operating system
Operating system the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
Overview i Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
General notes
! Do not use the space in front of the display Functions
for storage. Objects placed here could dam- The multimedia system has the following func-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid tions:
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in RRadio mode
impairments to the display, which could be RMedia mode with media search
irreversible. RSound systems
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your RNavigation system
ability to read the display. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Multimedia system
The display has an automatic temperature-con- Audio 20: navigation via SD card
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RCommunication functions
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
completely. RVehicle functions with system settings
RFavorites functions
Cleaning instructions
Controller
! Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a The controller in the center console lets you:
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the Rselect menu items on the display
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
Renter characters
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
Rselect a destination on the map
The display must be switched off and have
Rsave entries
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when The controller can be:
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rturned 3
age to the display.
Rslid left or right 1
Rslid forwards or back 4
Switching the multimedia system
Rslid diagonally 2
on/off
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7
X Press the q control knob.
Back button
Adjusting the volume
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
X Turn the q control knob. call up the main menu of the current operating
The volume is adjusted: mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the %
Rfor the currently selected media source
button.
Rduring traffic or navigation announcements
The multimedia system changes to the next
Rin hands-free mode during an active call higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
Switching the sound on or off X To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
X Press the 8 button on the control panel. The multimedia system changes to the main
If the audio output is switched off, the status menu of the current operating mode.
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
Operating system 245
Favorites button Navigation mode

You can assign predefined functions using the Important safety notes
g favorites button and call them up by press-
ing the button (Y page 245). G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
Favorites munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle when driving, you may be distracted from
Calling up and exiting favorites the traffic situation. You could also lose con-
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci-
X To call up: press the g button on the con-
troller. dent.
X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle
Vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic
The favorites are displayed. situation permits. If you are not sure that this
Multimedia system
X To exit: press the g button again. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
Adding favorites ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the

Adding predefined favorites country in which you are currently driving when
X Press the g button. operating the navigation system.
X COMAND: slide 6 the controller.
X Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 the controller. General notes
The menu bar is displayed.
Among other things, correct functioning of the
X Select Reassign.
Reassign navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
The categories are displayed. certain situations, GPS reception may be
X Select a category. impaired, there may be interference or there
The favorites are displayed. may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
X Select a favorite. parking garages.
X COMAND: to add the favorite to the desired Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT
position, turn and press the controller. (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Audio 20: to add the favorite to the desired The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions
position, turn, slide 5 or 6 and press the are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD
controller. card box contains a quick guide.
If a favorite has already been added at this The following descriptions apply to navigation
position, it will be overwritten. with COMAND. Further information can be
found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Adding your own favorites
You can add climate control as a favorite, for Selecting a route type and route options
example.
Multimedia system:
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQClimate
Climate Control.
Control
X Press and hold the g button until the X NaviQNavigation
Select Navi Navigation.
favorites are displayed. The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X Add a favorite to the desired position. X Slide 6 the controller.
If a favorite has already been added at this X Select Options
OptionsQRoute
Route Settings.
Settings
position, it will be overwritten. Notes for route types:
REco Route
RDynamic Traffic Route
Z
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid- X Select the location.
ance are taken into account (not available in If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
all countries). different ZIP codes available for the location,
RDynamic TRF. Route After Request the corresponding digits are displayed with an
You can decide whether or not current traffic X.
reports should be included in the route cal- X Enter the street and house number.
culation (not available in all countries). The address is in the menu.
RCalculate Alternative Routes Further options for destination entry:
Different routes are being calculated. In order Rsearch for a keyword
to do so, instead of Start
Start, select the menu The keyword search finds destinations using
item Continue.
Continue fragments of words.
X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Rselect the last destination
Options.
Options
Rselect a contact
X Select a route option.
Rselect a POI
Multimedia system
Notes for route options:

You can search for a POI by location, name or
RUse Toll Roads telephone number.
The route calculation includes roads which Rselect destination on the map
require you to pay a usage fee (toll). Renter intermediate destination
RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:
You can map the route to the destination
(only available in the USA) yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access tions.
conditions for carpool lanes. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool Apps
lanes option is activated. Rselect geo-coordinates
Entering an address Calculating the route

Multimedia system: Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
X NaviQNavigation
Select Navi Navigation. is in the menu.
The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Select Start or Continue
Continue.
X Slide 6 the controller. The route is calculated with the selected route
X Select Destination
DestinationQAddressAddress Entry.
Entry type and the selected route options.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows: If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number
to end the current route guidance.
Rstate/province, city or ZIP code X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Rcity or ZIP code, center Set as Intermediate Destination.
Destination
Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels
X Select City
City. the current route guidance and starts route
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- calculation to the new destination.
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Set as Intermediate Destination adds
Below this, you will see locations for which the new destination in addition to the existing
route guidance has already been carried out. destination and opens the intermediate des-
X Enter the city. tinations list.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-
ler.
Connecting a mobile phone procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
(COMAND) available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
Requirements information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Manual).
require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile mobile phone, this may be due to particular
1.0 or above. security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Multimedia system: manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System Set‐ multimedia system at any one time.
tingsQActivate
tings Activate Bluetooth.
Bluetooth
Searching for a mobile phone
X Activate Bluetooth® O.
Multimedia system:
Mobile phone:
Multimedia system
X Select Tel/®QConn.
Tel/ Conn.
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Device Search for PhonesQStart
DeviceQSearch Phones Start
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Search.
Search
manufacturer's operating instructions). The available mobile phones are displayed.
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- Symbols in the device list
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile Sym- Explanation
phone, change the device name (see the man- bol
ufacturer's operating instructions). Ï New mobile phone found, not yet
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone authorized.
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow- Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is
ing information will be transmitted after you not connected.
connect: # Mobile phone is authorized and
RPhone book connected.
RCall lists
RText messages and e-mail Connecting a mobile phone
i Further information on suitable mobile Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
phones can be found at: http:// X Select mobile phone.
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
i In the USA, you can get in touch with the
X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). system.
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
Searching for and authorizing (connect- prompt to confirm may take up to two
ing) a mobile phone minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
Before using your mobile phone with the multi- er's operating instructions).
media system for the first time, you will need to X If the codes are different: select No on the
search for the phone and then authorize (con- multimedia system.
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author- The process is canceled.
ization either takes place by means of Secure Repeat authorization.
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
Z
Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
phone. Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-
The input menu for the passkey is displayed. ing information is transmitted after you connect
X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
the main telephone:
nation as a passkey. RPhone book
X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. RCall lists
X Press ¬ to confirm. RText messages and e-mail
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
i Further information on suitable mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, phones can be found at: http://
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up i In the USA, you can get in touch with the
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
Multimedia system
ufacturer's operating instructions). on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Connecting a mobile phone (Audio 20)
Searching for and authorizing (connect-
Requirements ing) a mobile phone
For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
require at least one Bluetooth®-capable mobile media system for the first time, you will need to
phone depending on use of one-telephone search for the phone and then authorize (con-
mode or two-telephone mode. The mobile nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or ization either takes place by means of Secure
above. Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
In two-telephone mode you can use all the multimedia system automatically makes the
functions of the multimedia system with the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
main telephone. With the additional tele- available. The mobile phone is always connec-
phone, you can receive incoming calls. ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
Multimedia system: multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
X Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem
System Set‐ Manual).
tings
tingsQActivate
Activate Bluetooth.
Bluetooth If the multimedia system does not detect your
X Activate Bluetooth® O. mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
Mobile phone: manufacturer's operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue- Searching for a mobile phone
tooth® visibility for other devices (see the Multimedia system:
manufacturer's operating instructions). X Select Tel/®QConn.
Tel/ Conn. DeviceQCon‐
Device Con‐
The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- nect New Device
Device.
ufacturer's products might be identical. To X Select Connect via vehicle.
vehicle
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile X Select mobile phone.
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). Connecting a mobile phone
X One-telephone mode: select Main Phone
Phone.
X Two telephone mode: select Additional
Phone (Incoming Calls Only) when a
mobile phone is already connected.
X Authorization using Secure Simple Pair- on. Further information on media mode (see the
ing: Digital Operator's Manual).
A code is displayed in the multimedia system The following external media sources can be
and on the mobile phone. used:
X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend- RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
connection to the multimedia system and for
(Y page 250)
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The
RCD
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- RDVD (COMAND)
er's operating instructions). RSD cards
X If the codes are different: select No on the Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth®
multimedia system.
The process is canceled. i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD
Repeat authorization. changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Multimedia system
or
X Authorization by entering a passkey
Selecting using the device list
(passcode): enter any one- to sixteen-digit Multimedia system:
number sequence which you have chosen
yourself into the passkey input menu.
X Select Media
MediaQDevices
Devices.
The available media sources will be shown.
X Press ¬ to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile X Select the media source.
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, Playable files are played.
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up Inserting/removing an SD card
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions). Important safety notes
G WARNING
Symbols in the device manager SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
The symbols are shown in color depending on lowed and cause choking. This poses an
their use. increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
Symbol Explanation
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
Mobile phone connected to the tion immediately.
multimedia system
! If you are no longer using the SD card, you
Main telephone with full range of should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
functions cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
Additional telephone for incoming Inserting an SD card

calls in two telephone mode The SD card slot is located on the control panel.
X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until
the SD card engages. The side with the con-
Media mode tacts must face down.
General notes Removing an SD card

If you wish to play external media sources, the X Press the SD card.
appropriate media mode must already be turned The SD card is ejected.
X Remove the SD card.
Z
Connecting USB devices
X Connect the USB device to the USB port.

Multimedia system
There are two USB ports in the stowage space

under the armrest.
X Select the media source (Y page 249).
Stowage areas 251
Loading guidelines RPosition heavy loads as far forward as possi-

ble and as low down in the cargo compart-
ment as possible.
G WARNING RThe load must not protrude above the upper
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or edge of the seat backrests.
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip RAlways place the load against the rear or front
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- backrests are securely locked into place.
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
den change in direction. seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
Always store objects so that they cannot be
nets to transport loads and luggage.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-
loads against slipping or tipping before the rials appropriate for the weight and size of the
journey. load.
RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage
Stowage and features

G WARNING well under the cargo compartment floor is
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust 55 lbs (25 kg).
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
is open when the engine is running, particu- wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
protection.
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment. ! Do not position the load on one part of the
There is a risk of poisoning. folding cargo compartment floor only. The
maximum load capacity of the folding cargo
Turn off the engine before opening the tail- compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg). Dis-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open. tribute the weight evenly to avoid damaging
the cargo compartment floor. Place a solid
G WARNING board under the load if necessary. Please
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can note that the load on the cargo compartment
floor will be increased when the load is lashed
become very hot. If you come into contact down.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the Stowage areas
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch- Stowage spaces
ing them. Important safety notes
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle G WARNING
are dependent on the distribution of the load
within the vehicle. If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
Observe the following notes when loading and and these are not adequately secured, they
transporting a load: could slip or be flung around and thereby
RNever exceed the maximum permissible strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
rating for the vehicle (including occupants). phone brackets may not always be able to
The values are specified on the vehicle iden- hold the objects placed in them in the event of
tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
door. larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place
changes of direction.
to carry objects.
Z
252 Stowage areas
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they X To open: press marking :.
cannot be tossed about in these or similar Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is
situations. always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- Stowage compartment in the front center
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage console
nets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 251).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box
X To open: press the marking on cover :.
i Depending on the vehicle equipment, there
may be an ashtray in the center console
instead of a storage compartment.
Stowage compartment in front of the arm-
rest (vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion)
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box

flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until
it engages.
There is a pen holder at the top of the glove box
flap.
Eyeglasses compartment
X To open: press the marking on cover :.
i You can remove the non-slip mat and the

insert for cleaning. When removing the insert
you will have to overcome some slight resist-
ance.
Stowage areas 253
Stowage compartment under the armrest Parcel nets

Stowage nets are located:
Rin the front-passenger footwell
Ron the back of the driver's and the front-
passenger seat
Ron the left and right-hand side in the cargo
compartment
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 251)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(Y page 251).
X To open: on vehicles with movable armrests, Folding backrest on the front-

make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost passenger seat
position.

X Press button : and fold the armrest up. G WARNING
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the arm- If the backrest of the front-passenger seat is
rest can be moved backwards or forwards in a folded forward, rear seat passengers can
longitudinal direction. come in contact with parts of the seat mech-
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- anism. particularly in the event of an accident,
lowing may be in the stowage compartment: a heavy braking or a sudden change of direc-
multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot tion. There is a risk of injury.
and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®,
iPhone® or MP3 player; see the separate oper- If a passenger travels in the vehicle while the
ating instructions. front-passenger seat is folded forward, they
must sit in the rear seat behind the driver.
Stowage space in the rear
The backrest of the front-passenger seat can be
Stowage compartment in the rear center folded forwards to increase the cargo compart-
ment capacity.
console
Once you no longer need the backrest on the
front-passenger side to be used as a load sur-
face, fold the backrest back into place.
X To open: pull down the top of stowage com-

partment : by the edge of the handle.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, X To fold forward: gently push the backrest
there may be an open stowage space above back.
the stowage compartment. X Pull release handle : and fold the backrest
fully onto the seat cushion until it engages.
Z
254 Stowage areas
X To fold back: gently push the backrest down Cargo compartment enlargement
and pull release handle :.
X Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Through-loading facility in the rear If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-

partment cannot be restrained by the seat
X To open: fold down seat armrest :. backrest.
X Pull the center head restraint on the rear There is an increased risk of injury.
bench seat into the uppermost position Before every trip, make sure that the seat
(Y page 98). backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
! Before folding the backrest in the rear com-

partment forwards, make sure that the rear
compartment armrest and the cupholder are
folded in. They may otherwise be damaged.
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded forwards separately to increase
the cargo compartment capacity.
Notes on using the cargo compartment

X Slide locking mechanism = in the direction
of the arrow. Making the best use of your cargo compart-
X Swing flap ; fully to the side. ment:
Flap ; is held open by a magnet. RYou can increase the load capacity by adjust-
X To close: swing flap ; in the cargo compart- ing the backrest to the cargo position
(Y page 255).
ment back until it engages.
RThe load area can be lengthened by folding
X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
forward the folding backrest of the front-
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 251). passenger seat (Y page 253) and the corre-
sponding backrest in the rear.
Stowage areas 255
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

and back
Folding the rear seat backrests forward
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat

forward if necessary.
X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-

ble.
X Fully insert the backrest head restraints if
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
necessary (Y page 98).
(Y page 98).
forward if necessary.
back if necessary.
X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ;
of the seat backrest forward.
Corresponding seat backrest : is released. Adjusting the angle of the rear seat
X Fold backrest : forward. backrests (cargo position)
back if necessary.
Vehicles with the cargo compartment package:

to enlarge the cargo compartment, you can
X Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder :. adjust the rear seat backrests to a 15° steeper
angle (cargo position).
Folding the rear seat backrest back X Fold the seat backrest forward (Y page 255).
! Make sure that the seat belt does not X Move handle : in the direction of the arrow.
become trapped when folding the rear seat X Push back seat backrest ; as far as han-
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- dle : until the backrest engages.
aged. The backrest is now in the cargo position.
Z
256 Stowage areas
Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 251).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip : Bag hook
protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
Parcel shelf
RPad sharp edges for protection.
! The maximum load which may be placed on

the parcel shelf is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
: Cargo tie-down rings
Bag hook X To remove: detach straps : from the tail-

gate.
G WARNING X Fold the parcel shelf downwards.
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects X Pull the parcel shelf out to the rear ;.
or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug- X To install: place the parcel shelf on the guide
gage could be flung around and thereby hit rails on the left and right.
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly X Push the parcel shelf evenly forwards using
changing directions. There is a risk of injury. both hands until it engages.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. X Fold the parcel shelf up.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile X Attach straps : to the tailgate.
objects on the bag hooks.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of Stowage well under the cargo com-
6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure partment floor
a load.
G WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
Features 257
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of Roof carrier

injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction. Important safety notes
Always close the cargo compartment floor G WARNING
before a journey. When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
! The maximum load capacity of the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor is istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
55 lbs (25 kg). load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a stowage area for TIREFIT, the vehicle
tool kit, a folding box, etc. underneath the cargo There is a risk of an accident.
compartment floor. Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
Opening/closing the cargo compart-
ment floor ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only

use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel fully and open
the tailgate fully when the roof carrier is
installed.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
X To open: open the tailgate. (Y page 335).
X Unlock the cargo compartment floor. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
X Holding ribbing ;, press handle : down- may become detached from the vehicle. You
wards. must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
Handle : folds up. carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier

X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. In
doing so, observe the manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
Features
Cup holder
X Using handle :, swing the cargo compart- Important safety notes

ment floor upwards as far as side flaps =,
then overcome the resistance of flaps =. G WARNING
X Place the cargo compartment floor on side The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
flaps =. whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
Z
258 Features
traveling, the container may be flung around Cup holder in the front center console
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
be distracted from the traffic conditions and
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
tainers of the right size. Always close the con-
tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
G WARNING : Cup holder

If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they

could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
RAlways stow objects in such a way that they
The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath
cannot be tossed about in these or similar can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with
situations. clean, lukewarm water only.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections of
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage cup holder : on the driver's and front-
nets or stowage nets. passenger sides until they release.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces are X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can be
shut before beginning your journey. removed.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of

the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
The stowage compartments in the doors provide
space for bottles:
Rfront: capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l) X To install: insert cup holder into lateral
curved sections ; in the stowage compart-
ment. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge
Features 259
of the upper section of cup holder : faces

forwards.
X Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the rear
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder : Mirror light
could be damaged. ; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror

A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.
Glare from the side

X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X Fold down the sun visor.
X To open: press the front of cup holder : X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
or ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until
it engages. Ashtray
Front ashtray
Sun visors ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not
Overview heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
G WARNING properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged.
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
Z
260 Features
X Vehicles with a stowage compartment Your attention must always be focused on the
cover: press the lower section of cover :. traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
The stowage compartment opens. when road and traffic conditions permit.
X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and
out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert = into
the holder until it engages.
i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear compartment ashtray


X Vehicles with a stowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge.

X To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the mbrace
direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases.
General notes
X Lift insert ; up and out.
X To install the insert: install insert ; from You must have a license agreement to activate
above into the holder and press down until it the mbrace service. Make sure that your system
engages. is activated and operational. To log in, press the
ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps
mentioned are not carried out, the system may
not be activated.
Cigarette lighter If you have questions about the activation, con-
G WARNING tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
lighter.
RCanada: Customer Service at
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: 1-888-923-8367
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Shortly after successfully registering with the
Ra
service, a user ID and password will be sent to
child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
you by post.
objects, for example
USA only: you can use this password to log onto
There is a risk of fire and injury. the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. http://www.mbusa.com.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Features 261
The system is available if: RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
Rit has been activated and is operational lowing buttons continues to light up red after
the system self-diagnosis:
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is
- SOS button
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
tomer Center - F Roadside Assistance call button
Ra service subscription is available - ï MB Info call button
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐
ative or Service Not Activated message
i Determining the location of the vehicle on a appears in the multifunction display.
map is only possible if: If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
RGPS reception is available. the system may not operate as expected. In the
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to event of an emergency, help will have to be
the Customer Assistance Center. summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
The mbrace system Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the
following service hotlines:

To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
follows: Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
X Press the W or X button on the multi- (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
function steering wheel. RCanada: Customer Service at
or 1-888-923-8367
X Use the multimedia system's volume control.
The system offers various services, e.g.: Emergency call
RAutomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
G WARNING
USA only: you can find information and a It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
description of all available features under "Own- even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
System self-test cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
After you have switched on the ignition, the sys- Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
tem carries out a self-diagnosis. road
A malfunction in the system has been detected Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
if one of the following occurs:
seen by other road users, particularly when
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
dark or in poor visibility conditions
come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
self-diagnosis of the system. lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
button does not light up during self-diagnosis cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
of the system. vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
You must have a license agreement to activate

the mbrace service. Make sure that your system
is activated and operational. To register, press
the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps
Z
262 Features
mentioned are not carried out, the system may cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-
not be activated. ously.
If you have questions about the activation, con- The Call Failed message appears in the mul-
tact one of the following telephone hotlines: tifunction display and must be confirmed.
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance In this case, summon assistance by other
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes means.
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
Making an emergency call
1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered.
i You cannot end an automatically triggered
emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button X To initiate an emergency call manually:
flashes. The Connecting Call message press cover : briefly to open.
appears in the multifunction display. X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The audio output is muted. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
Once the connection has been made, the Call until the emergency call is concluded.
Connected message appears in the multifunc- X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-
tion display. Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All important information on the emergency is X After the emergency call, close cover :.
transmitted, for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined
i If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emer-
by the GPS system) gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi-
Rvehicle identification number ately after pressing the SOS button, you will
Rinformation on the severity of the accident not know whether mbrace placed the emer-
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi- gency call. In this case, always summon assis-
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab- tance by other means.
lished between the Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants. Breakdown assistance button
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unable to initiate an emer-
gency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The indi-
Features 263
X Press breakdown assistance call button :. The Call Failed message appears in the
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- multifunction display.
tomer Assistance Center. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
The indicator lamp in breakdown assistance multifunction steering wheel.
button : flashes while the call is active. The
or
Connecting Call message appears in the
multifunction display. The audio output is X Press the corresponding multimedia system
muted. button for ending a phone call.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction MB Info call button
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
Rcurrent location of the vehicle

Rvehicle identification number
i The display of the multimedia system indi-

cates that a call is active. During the call, you
can change to the navigation menu by press-
ing the NAVI button on the multimedia sys-
tem, for example.
X Press MB Info call button :.
Voice output is not available. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
A voice connection is established between the tomer Assistance Center.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
and the vehicle occupants. flashes while the connection is being made.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the The Connecting call message appears in
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center the multifunction display. The audio system is
can ascertain the nature of the problem muted.
(Y page 266). If a connection can be made, the Call con‐
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- nected message appears in the multifunction
ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech- display.
nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz are available, the system transfers data to the
Service Center. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
You may be charged for services such as repair for example:
work and/or towing.
Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Further details are available in your mbrace
Rvehicle identification number
manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate a i The display of the multimedia system indi-
breakdown assistance call, if: cates that a call is active. During the call, you
can change to the navigation menu by press-
Rthe indicator lamp for breakdown assis- ing the NAVI button on the multimedia sys-
tance call button : is flashing continu- tem, for example.
ously. Voice output is not available.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab- A voice connection is established between the
lished. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example. You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-
Z
264 Features
vice Center and about other products and serv- Downloading destinations in COMAND
ices from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on Downloading destinations
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at Downloading destinations gives you access to a
http://www.mbusa.com. database with over 15 million points of interest
i The system has not been able to initiate an (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
MB Info call, if: gation system in your vehicle. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded.
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button : Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
is flashing continuously. Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz in the vicinity.
Customer Assistance Center was estab- Furthermore, you can download routes with up
lished. to 20 way points.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
network is not available, for example. the address entered.
The Call failed message appears in the The system calculates the route and subse-
multifunction display. quently starts the route guidance with the

X To end a call: press the ~ button on the address entered.
multifunction steering wheel. i If you select No
No, the address can be saved in
or the address book.
X Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call. i The Destination Download function is avail-
able if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and data transfer is possible.
Call priority
i The Destination Download function can only
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside be used if the vehicle is equipped with a nav-
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call igation system.
can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency
call will take priority and override all other active Route Assistance
calls. This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
The indicator lamp of the respective button and cannot be purchased separately.
flashes until the call is ended. i You can also use the Route Assistance func-
An emergency call can only be terminated by the tion if your vehicle is not equipped with a nav-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. igation system.
All other calls can be ended by pressing: Within the framework of this service, you receive
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering a professional and reliable form of navigation
wheel support without having to leave your vehicle.
Rthe corresponding multimedia system button The customer service representative finds a
for ending a phone call suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-
rent position and the desired destination. You
i When a call is initiated, the audio system is will then be guided live through the current route
muted. The mobile phone is no longer con- section.
nected to the multimedia system. However, if
you want to use your mobile phone, do so only
when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe Search and Send
location.
General notes
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must
be equipped with mbrace and a navigation
system. Additionally, an mbrace service sub-
scription must be completed.
Features 265
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A If multiple vehicles are registered under the
destination address found on Google Maps™ same e-mail address, the destination will be
can be transferred via mbrace directly to your sent to all the vehicles.
vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destination Vehicle remote opening
address You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
X Go to the website http:// have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
www.maps.google.com and enter a destina- replacement SmartKey is not available.
tion address into the entry field. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
X To send the destination address to the e- Benz Customer Assistance Center.
mail address of your mbrace account: The vehicle can be immediately opened
click on the corresponding button on the web- remotely within four days of the ignition being
site. turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
i Example: may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then

remotely.
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will
be sent to your vehicle. X Contact the following service hotlines:
X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
Enter the e-mail address you specified when (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
setting up your mbrace account into the cor-
responding field.
1-888-923-8367
X Click "Send".
You will be asked for your password.
i Information on specific commands such as X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
website. tance Center.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
Calling up destination addresses opened via:
X Switch on the ignition.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
The destination address is loaded into the
vehicle's navigation system. tion
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,
A display message appears, asking whether
navigation should be started. Android™)
X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY the To do this, you will need your identification num-
controller and confirm with W. ber and password.
The system calculates the route and subse- i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
quently starts the route guidance with the the corresponding mobile phone network is
address entered. accessible.
i If you select No,
No the address can be saved in
the address book. Vehicle remote closing
i If you have sent more than one destination The valet locking feature can be used when you
address, each individual destination must be have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no
confirmed separately. longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-
i Destination addresses are loaded in the Benz Customer Assistance Center.
same order as the order in which they were
sent. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
within four days of the ignition being turned off.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles After this time, remote closing may be delayed
with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
can no longer be valet locked remotely.
Z
266 Features
X Contact the following service hotlines: vice representative can use the received data to
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance decide what kind of assistance is required. You
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes are then, for example, guided to the nearest
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery
vehicle is called.
1-888-923-8367 If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an
You will be asked for your password. MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐
switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked nected message in the multimedia system dis-
Remotelyol message appears in the multifunc- play. If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
tion display. can be started, the Request for vehicle
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be diagnosis received. Start vehicle
locked via: diagnosis? message appears in the display.
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- X Confirm the message with Yes Yes.
tion X When the Vehicle diagnosis: Please
Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, start ignition message appears, turn the
Android™) SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
To do this, you will need your identification num- (Y page 128).
ber and password. X When the Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and move
i The vehicle remote closing feature is avail- your vehicle to a safe position mes-
able when the relevant mobile phone network sage appears, follow the customer service
is available and data connection is possible. representative's instructions.
The message in the display disappears.
Stolen vehicle recovery service If you select Cancel the remote malfunction
diagnosis is canceled completely.
If your vehicle has been stolen:
The vehicle operating state check begins. You
X Notify the police. will see the Vehicle diagnosis activated
The police will issue a numbered incident message.
report.
X This number will be forwarded to the
When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center fer vehicle diagnostics data (Voice
together with your PIN. connection may be interrupted during
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
Center then tries to locate the system. The data can now be sent to the Customer Assis-
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center tance center.
contacts you and the local law enforcement X Press OK to confirm the message.
agency if the vehicle is located. The voice connection with the Customer
However, only the law enforcement agency is Assistance Center is terminated.
informed of the location of the vehicle. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis:
Transferring data... message.
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Assistance Center.
Customer Assistance Center is automatically
notified. Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
Assistance Center can provide improved sup- phone.
port for problems with your vehicle. During an Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the the transfer of service data to the Customer
Customer Assistance Center. The customer ser- Assistance Center. If a service is due, the mul-
Features 267
timedia system display shows a message to this The data you receive contains the following
effect together with information about any spe- information:
cial offers at your workshop. Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-
USA only: this information can also be called up ded
under "Owners Online" at http:// Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee-
www.mbusa.com. ded
Information on Roadside Assistance Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
(Y page 26).
Geo fencing
Downloading routes
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
save predefined routes in the navigation sys- informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
tem. To do this, an SD memory card must be of the selected areas. You can select the way in
inserted into the multimedia system. If no SD which you receive this information beforehand.
memory card is inserted, you must insert the Possible options include text message, e-mail or

card into the card slot on the multimedia system an automated call.
before saving the route.
The area can be determined as either a circle or
A route can be prepared and sent either by a a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
customer service representative or via the can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-
mbrace portal on the Internet. ferent settings are possible for each area.
Each route can include up to 20 way points. USA only: these settings can be called up under
Once a route has been received by the naviga- "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
tion system, you will see the <route name>
has been saved to memory card. Do you Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and
want to start route guidance? message in inform the customer service representative that
the multimedia system display. The route is you wish to activate geo fencing.
saved to the SD memory card. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
X To start route guidance: select Yes.
message.
Yes
An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
play. Triggering the vehicle alarm
i If you select No,
No the saved route can be With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's
called up later via the navigation menu. panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds
X Select Start.
Start and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
Route guidance starts. the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
i Downloaded and saved routes can be called
up again in the multimedia system.
You can find information about this in the Garage door opener
separate operating instructions.
General notes
Speed alert The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated
You can define the upper speed limit, which in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. to three different door and gate systems.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, Use the integrated garage door opener only on
a message will be sent to the Customer Assis- garage doors that:
tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
then forwards this information to you. Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
You can select the way in which you receive this Once programed, the integrated garage door
information beforehand. Possible options opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
include text message, e-mail or an automated function of the garage door system's remote
call.
Z
268 Features
control. Please also read the operating instruc- Programming

tions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park Programming the buttons
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not leave the Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
engine running while programming. (Y page 268).
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge) Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
More information on HomeLink® and/or com-
patible products is also available online at X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
http://www.homelink.com. lock (Y page 128).
Notes on the declaration of conformity X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the
(Y page 27). garage door drive.
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 X To start program mode: press and hold one
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage
door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program
Important safety notes mode. After a short time, indicator lamp :
lights up yellow.
G WARNING
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
When you operate or program the garage door button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
with the integrated garage door opener, per- If the selected button has already been pro-
sons in the range of movement of the garage gramed, indicator lamp : will only light up
door can become trapped or struck by the yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
garage door. There is a risk of injury. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
When using the integrated garage door
X To program the remote control: point
opener, always make sure that nobody is
garage door remote control A towards but-
within the range of movement of the garage tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-
door. tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X Press and hold button B on remote control
G WARNING A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling gramming is finished.
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
synchronize the rolling code (Y page 269).
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
X Release button B on remote control A for
out sufficient ventilation. the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
Features 269
so, vary the distance between remote control Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers
A and the rear-view mirror. also feature a "break".
The required distance between remote con- Proceed as follows:
trol A and the integrated garage door opener Rif you live in Canada
depends on the garage door drive system.
Rif you have difficulties programming the
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least garage door opener (regardless of where you
25 seconds before trying another position. live) as you follow the programming steps.
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
Synchronizing the rolling code integrated garage door opener.
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
(Y page 268). yellow.
X Release the button.
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
door system with the integrated garage door X Press button B of garage door remote con-
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will trol A for two seconds, then release it for two

need to use the programming button on the door seconds.
drive control panel. The programming button X Press button B again for two seconds.
may be located in different places depending on X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the control A until indicator lamp : lights up
door drive unit on the garage ceiling. green.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- gramming is finished.
ming additional remote controls", before carry- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
ing out the following steps. gramming was successful. The next step is to
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage synchronize the rolling code.
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei- X Release button B of remote control A of the
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are garage door drive.
present within the sweep of the door or gate. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition programming process for the corresponding
lock (Y page 128). button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
X Get out of the vehicle. so, vary the distance between remote control
X Press the programming button on the door
A and the rear-view mirror.
drive unit. The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
depends on the garage door drive system.
the next step.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
X Get into the vehicle. should test every position for at least
X Press previously programed button ;, = 25 seconds before trying another position.
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly and in quick succession until the Problems when programming
door closes. If you are experiencing problems programming
The rolling code synchronization is then com- the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
plete. view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
tions:
Notes on programming the remote con-
RCheck the transmitter frequency used by
trol
garage door drive remote control A and
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
(or interruption) of the transmission signals quency can usually be found on the back of
after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, remote control A for the garage door drive.
these signals may not last long enough for the
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not The integrated garage door opener is com-
detected during programming. Comparable with patible with devices that have units which
Z
270 Features
operate in the frequency range of 280 to Clearing the memory

433 MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door remote
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
control A. This increases the likelihood that integrated garage door opener before selling the
garage door remote control A will transmit a vehicle.
strong and precise signal to the integrated X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
garage door opener. lock (Y page 128).
RWhen programming, hold remote control A X Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
at varying distances and angles from but- The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try and then green.
various angles at a distance between 2and X Release buttons ; and ?.
8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but The memory of the integrated garage door
at varying distances. opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
RIf another remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control Compass
A. Before performing these steps, make sure

that new batteries have been installed in Calling up the compass
garage door drive remote control A.
RNote that some remote controls only transmit
for a limited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of the : Rear-view mirror
garage door system remote control. Please also ; Compass display
read the operating instructions for the garage = Opening
door system.
The compass displays in which compass direc-
tion the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE
NE, E,
lock (Y page 128). SE,
SE S, SW,
SW W or NW
NW.
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
To receive a correct compass display reading,
programmed to operate the garage door. the magnetic field zone must be set and the
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- compass calibrated.
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
Features 271
Setting the compass Magnetic field zone maps

X Set your location using the magnetic field North America
zone maps (Y page 271).
X Push a round pen into opening = for approx-
imately three seconds.
The magnetic field zone currently selected
appears in compass display ;.
X To select the magnetic field zone: push a
round pen into opening = until the desired
magnetic field zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in compass
display ; changes direction, the magnetic
field zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass

Notes
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage South America
transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear win-
dow defroster.
Rclose all doors and the tailgate.
Calibrating
X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding traf-
fic.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Push a round pin into opening = for approx-
imately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in
compass display ;.
X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approx-
imately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
When the calibration has been successfully
completed, the current direction is shown in
compass display ;.
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
Z
272 Features
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats

securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X Slide the seat back.

X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X Press safety catch knobs : onto retain-
ers ;.
X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Engine compartment 273
Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches

Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
Hood
ple, away from moving parts
G WARNING
G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you
There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury.
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
G WARNING is switched on.
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Opening the hood
a risk of injury to persons within range of
Maintenance and care

movement of the hood. G WARNING
Open and close the hood only when no one is Certain components in the engine compart-
within its range of movement. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a
Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and
compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the
or other service products. There is a risk of following.
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before G WARNING
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the When the hood is open and the windshield
engine compartment, keep the hood closed wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
and contact the fire department. the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood.
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
ers or the hood.
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Z
274 Engine compartment
Closing the hood

X Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time,
remove support strut ? from yellow retaining
clip =.
X Swing support strut ? down and press it into
bracket A until it engages.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Do not press the hood
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are closed. Open the hood again and close it with
switched off. a little more force.
X Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle

consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface
X Reach into the gap between the hood and the
Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-
radiator trim and press hood catch lever ; to
the left. imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature
X Raise the hood.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
out the measurement
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-

stick
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Working in the engine compartment poses a
X Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yel- risk of injury.
low retaining clip =. Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Engine compartment 275
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are

approved for vehicles with a service system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordance with
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after
tube. the replacement interval specified by the
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. service system has expired
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube RUse of engine oil additives
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
mark ;, the oil level is correct. engine oil can result in damage to the engine

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. engine oil siphoned off.
Adding engine oil

G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
Example: engine oil cap
following.
X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
G WARNING X Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
ponents in the engine compartment, it may engine oil.
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to clockwise.
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
ponents before starting the engine. (Y page 274).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 332).
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
Z
276 Engine compartment
Checking and adding other service X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
products and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
Checking coolant level it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, Windshield washer system
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is a risk of injury. G WARNING
Let the engine cool down before you open the Certain components in the engine compart-
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
open the cap to relieve pressure. of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
! The coolant may only be checked and cor- risk of injury.
rected when the engine is cool (coolant tem- Where possible, let the engine cool down and
perature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Checking the
coolant when the coolant temperature is
above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result in damage to following.

the engine or to the engine cooling system.
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
104 ‡ (40 †).
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X Turn the SmartKey to position g
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
(Y page 128) in the ignition lock .
until it engages.
X Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise and to
relieve excess pressure. If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
remove it. in the multifunction display prompting you to
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = add washer fluid (Y page 229).
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough Further information on windshield washer fluid/
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. antifreeze (Y page 334).
ASSYST PLUS 277
ASSYST PLUS Displaying service messages

Service message X Switch on the ignition.
X Press the = or ; button to select the
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Serv. menu.
informs you of the next service due date.
You can find information on the type of service ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-
and service intervals in the Maintenance Book- ing the a button.
let. The service due date appears in the multi-
You can obtain further information from an function display.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Information about Service
does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
level (Y page 274). interval display
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can

RService A in .. days be corrected at a qualified specialist work-
RService A due shop.
RService A overdue by .. days Have service work carried out as described in
Depending on the operating conditions of the the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the lead to increased wear and damage to the
next service due date is displayed. major assemblies or the vehicle.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
number or another letter, indicates the type of ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
service. A stands for a minor service and B for a ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
major service. service work has been carried out. You can also
You can obtain further information from an obtain further information on maintenance
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. work, for example.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during Special service requirements
which the battery is disconnected. The specified maintenance interval takes only
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched- the normal operation of the vehicle into
ule: account. Under arduous operating conditions or
X Note down the service due date displayed in increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
the multifunction display before disconnect- work must be carried out more frequently, for
ing the battery. example:
or Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the stops
battery disconnection periods from the ser- Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
vice date shown on the display. distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Hiding a service message Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods
Rin particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recir-
X Press the a or % button on the steering culation mode is frequently used
wheel.
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the interior filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil
and oil filter, for example, changed more fre-
Z
278 Care
quently. Under arduous operating conditions, Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
the tires must be checked more often. Further paintwork
information can be obtained at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes- Automatic car wash
Benz Center.
G WARNING
Driving abroad Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
also available in other countries. You can obtain After the vehicle has been washed, brake
further information from any authorized carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the

Care HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
General notes
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
H Environmental note Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning

Rwhen towing the vehicle
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
Rin the car wash
ner.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of Automatic Car Wash as these use special
the following: cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
Rdry, rough or hard cloths damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Rabrasive cleaning agents ! Make sure that the automatic transmission
Rsolvents is in position N when washing your vehicle in
Rcleaning agents containing solvents a tow-through car wash. The vehicle could be
damaged if the transmission is in another
Do not scrub.
position.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. ! Make sure that:
You could otherwise scratch or damage the Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are
surfaces and protective film. closed completely
! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of Rthe blower is switched off
time directly after cleaning, particularly after Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0
cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Rthe 360° camera or the rear view camera is
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- deactivated
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a wash from the very start.
long period of time. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
retaining the quality in the long term. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
Use care products and cleaning agents recom- from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.
Care 279
Washing by hand RLamps

RSeals
In some countries, washing by hand is only
RTrim
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country. RVentilation slots
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Damaged seals or electrical components can
vehicle in direct sunlight. lead to leaks or failures.
X Use a soft sponge to clean. ! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car vehicle are covered with a decorative film.
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- between the parts of the vehicle covered with
tle jet of water. the film and the nozzle of the high pressure
X Do not point the water jet directly towards the
cleaner.
air inlet. Information about the correct distance is
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
available from the equipment manufacturer.
frequently. Move the power washer nozzle around when
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
cleaning your vehicle.
thoroughly with a chamois.
Cleaning the paintwork

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
work.
! Do not affix:
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as Rstickers
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Rfilms
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Power washers
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
G WARNING damage the paintwork.
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
to the tires or chassis components. Compo- care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
Do not use power washers with circular jet X Soak insect remains with insect remover and
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
tires or chassis components replaced imme- X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
diately. the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
! Always maintain a distance of at least fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
power washer nozzle. Information about the fluid.
correct distance is available from the equip- X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
ment manufacturer.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
Do not aim directly at any of the following: surface, use the paint care products recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
RTires case approximately every three to five months,
RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. depending on the climate conditions and the
RElectrical components care product used.
RBattery If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
RConnectors
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
Z
280 Care
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz Cleaning the vehicle parts

should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on Cleaning the wheels
the hood while the hood is hot.
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch- G WARNING
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint- The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
work quickly and provisionally. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
Matte finish care nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
! The following may cause the paint to tires or chassis components replaced imme-
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
diately.
effect:
Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
unsuitable materials to remove brake dust. This could damage
Rfrequent use of automatic car washes wheel bolts and brake components.
Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing time directly after cleaning, particularly after
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
purpose of paintwork care. These products Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By
considerable surface damage or, more spe- heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
cifically, to shiny, spotted areas. pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a long period of time.
Cleaning the windows
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances. G WARNING
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear You could become trapped by the windshield
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with injury.
a clear matte finish.
The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand Always switch off the windshield wipers and
using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
water. wiper blades.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from
the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
products. the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
Care 281
! Clean the water drainage channels of the X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights
windshield and the rear window at regular with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
pollen may under certain circumstances pre- cloths.
vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec- Cleaning the mirror turn signals
tronic components.
X Clean the inside and outside of the windows ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
is recommended and approved by Mercedes- cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
Benz. scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
Cleaning wiper blades X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
G WARNING sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
You could become trapped by the windshield cloths.
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
Cleaning the sensors

injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and ! If you clean the sensors with a power
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
wiper blades.
and the power washer nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the equipment manufacturer.
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths Cleaning the rear view camera
which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
could scratch or damage the plastic light len- around the rear view camera with a power
ses. washer.
Z
282 Care
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by

cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
X Make sure that the vehicle is at a standstill Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
and the SmartKey is in key position 2 in the
Rabrasive cleaning agents
ignition lock.
Rcommercially-available household cleaning
X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
multimedia system (see the separate operat- agents
ing instructions). These may damage the display surface. Do
X To clean the rear view camera: use clear not put pressure on the display surface when
water and a soft cloth to clean camera cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
lens :. age to the display.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
G WARNING cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
display cleaner.
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
become very hot. If you come into contact cloth.
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Cleaning the plastic trim
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow G WARNING
these components to cool down before touch- Care products and cleaning agents containing
ing them. solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner. ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust agents to clean the cockpit.
pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers
should not be polished with a chrome polish.
They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For ! Never attach the following to plastic surfa-
optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed ces:
with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Rstickers
Commercially available engine and care oils Rfilms
are suitable for this. Rperfume oil container or similar
For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paint- You could otherwise damage the plastic.
work polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove
the excess polish residue after polishing. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
and corrosive environmental factors may cause tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
flash rust to form on the surface. You can the surfaces.
Care 283
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free Genuine leather seat covers
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
! To retain the natural appearance of the
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- leather, observe the following cleaning
ucts recommended and approved by instructions:
Mercedes-Benz.
RClean genuine leather covers carefully with
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again. a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or become soaked. It may otherwise become
selector lever rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom- been tested and approved by Mercedes-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- Leather is a natural product.
ments It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents Rdifferences in the texture

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes Rmarks caused by growth and injury
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- Rslight nuances of color
ing the surface.
These are characteristics of leather and not
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. material defects.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can Seat covers of other materials
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use ! Observe the following when cleaning:
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
the trim pieces.
moistened with a solution containing 1%
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized moistened with a solution containing 1%
Mercedes-Benz Center. detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- depend on the type of dirt and how long it
ucts recommended and approved by has been there.
Mercedes-Benz. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
Cleaning the seat covers tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
General notes Cleaning the seat belts

! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers G WARNING
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage Seat belts can become severely weakened if
the cover. bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
the appearance and comfort of the covers is an accident. This poses an increased risk of
retained over time. injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
Z
284 Care
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Where will I find...? 285
Where will I find...? Information on reflective safety jackets

Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing the reflective
safety jacket
: Maximum number of washes

; Maximum wash temperature
= Do not bleach
? Do not iron
A Do not use a laundry dryer
The reflective safety jackets are located in front B Do not dry-clean
door stowage compartments :. Reflective
C This is a class 2 vest
safety jackets can also be stored in the rear door
Breakdown assistance
stowage compartments. RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require-
X To remove: pull out the safety jacket bag ments defined by the legal standard only:
containing the reflective safety jacket. - if the correct size is used and
X Open the safety jacket bag and pull out the - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly
reflective safety jacket. fastened
X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety
it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. jackets are clean and intact. The special prop-
X Replace the safety jacket bag into stowage
erties may otherwise be compromised.
compartment :. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored
in their original packaging in a dry place away
i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from from sources of heat and light.
its packaging material before sliding it into
RThe maximum number of washes specified is
the stowage compartment. The packaging
material may otherwise cause it to slip out or not the only factor influencing the life span of
make removing it difficult. the reflective safety jackets. Their life span
also depends on use, care, storage, etc.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posed of and replaced with new ones:
- after 15 washes, and/or
- if the reflective strips have become
scratched, and/or
- if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
- if the fluorescence has faded e.g. due to the
effects of sunlight
RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner. To do so,
contact your local waste disposal company.
286 Where will I find...?
Warning triangle First-aid kit

Removing/replacing the warning trian-
gle
X Open the tailgate.

X To open the stowage compartment: turn
rotary knob : counter-clockwise and fold
X To remove: open the tailgate. down cover ;.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 257).
X To release warning triangle :, push back the
retainers on the bracket.

X Remove warning triangle : from the bracket.
X To replace: place warning triangle : back
into the bracket and push down to secure.
X Fold the cargo compartment floor down.
X Close the tailgate.
Setting up the warning triangle

X Remove first-aid kit =.
Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at
least once a year. Replace the contents if nec-
essary, and replace missing items.
Vehicle tool kit

General notes
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is
located in the stowage well under the cargo
X Fold feet = out to the side. compartment floor.
X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a tri- Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-
angle and lock them at the top using upper change tool kit is in the stowage well under the
press-stud :. cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tire changing tools are required and
Flat tire 287
approved to perform a wheel change on your Flat tire

vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may Preparing the vehicle
include, for example:
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RJack
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
RWheel chock
ties) (Y page 288)
RLug wrench
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
RAlignment bolt cles with MOExtended tires
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 286)
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(Y page 322).
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
: Tire inflation compressor X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
; Towing eye (Y page 147).
= Tire sealant filler bottle X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
X Open the tailgate. straight-ahead position.
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(Y page 257). X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 288) or remove it. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Towing eye = is located under tire inflation X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
compressor :. or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
g. This is the same as "Key removed".
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit
X Open the tailgate. or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards ton from the ignition lock (Y page 128).
(Y page 257). X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
X Remove the tire-change tool kit. via your smartphone (Y page 87).
X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
The tire-change tool kit contains:
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
RJack near the danger area while a wheel is being
RLug wrench changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
ROne pair of gloves in the wheel change should, for example,
RFolding wheel chock
stand behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
288 Flat tire
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
properties) you use the proper size and type (summer or
winter tire).
General notes Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- is therefore recommended that you additionally
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
or more tires. The affected tire must not show winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
any clearly visible damage. a qualified specialist workshop.
You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the Important safety notes
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear- G WARNING
ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 317).
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
MOExtended tires may be used only in conjunc-
tion with an activated tire pressure loss warning characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
(USA only). There is a risk of an accident.
If a pressure loss warning message appears Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
in the multifunction display: Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
Robserve the instructions in the display mes- and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
sages (Y page 224). off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
Rcheck the tire for damage vehicle.
Rif driving on, observe the following notes Stop driving in emergency mode if:
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
Ryou hear banging noises.
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully Rthevehicle starts to shake.
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- RESP®
tance possible depends upon: is intervening constantly.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
Rvehicle speed
Rroad condition After driving in emergency mode, have the
Routside temperature wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode workshop with regard to their further use. The
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions defective tire must be replaced in every case.
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is TIREFIT kit
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display. Important safety notes
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
When replacing one or all tires, please observe Only valid for USA: You can use TIREFIT to seal
the following specifications for your vehicle's punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly
tires: those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at
outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
Rsize
Rtype and
Rthe "MOExtended" marking
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be
Flat tire 289
G WARNING ! The electric air pump may be used again

once it has cooled down.
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above. Using the TIREFIT kit
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
G WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
X Do not remove any foreign objects which have
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
from children. There is a risk of injury.
X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
If you come into contact with the tire sealant, nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
observe the following: compressor from the stowage well under-
neath the cargo compartment floor
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin (Y page 287).
immediately with water. X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with instrument cluster within the driver's field of
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- vision.
oughly with clean water. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
! Residue from the tire sealant may come out

of the filler hose after use. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic X Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant
bottle :.
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of X Place tire sealant bottle : head down into
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist recess ; of the tire inflation compressor.
workshop.
Z
290 Flat tire
Tire pressure not reached

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not
been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X USA only: very slowly drive the vehicle for-
wards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire. After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-
sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
26 psi).
X Insert plug ? into a 12 V socket in your vehi-
cle. G WARNING
Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 260). If the required tire pressure is not reached
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- after the specified time, the tire is too badly
tion lock (Y page 128). damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
X Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
compressor to I. pressure that is too low can significantly
The tire inflation compressor is switched on. impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
The tire is inflated.
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). specialist workshop.
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase. Tire pressure reached
X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should then G WARNING
have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres- accident.
sure reached" (Y page 290).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has You should therefore adapt your driving style
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
pressure not reached" (Y page 290). the specified maximum speed with a tire that
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected has been repaired using tire sealant.
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
possible. USA only: The maximum permissible speed for
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker
cleaner as soon as possible. must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the
driver's field of vision.
Battery (vehicle) 291
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has

been attained after five minutes:
X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X USA only: Stow the tire sealant bottle and the
tire inflation compressor.
X Pull away immediately.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
tire inflation compressor. sure release button : next to pressure
The tire pressure must now be at least gauge ;.
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
G WARNING Note that tire sealant may escape when you
If the required tire pressure is not reached unscrew the filler hose.
after driving for a short period, the tire is too X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair sealed tire.
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
tire pressure that is too low can significantly tion compressor.
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- The filler hose remains attached to the tire
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. sealant bottle.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
specialist workshop. shop and have the tire changed there.
X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon
i USA only: In cases such as the one men- as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
tioned above, contact an authorized X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X USA only: Correct the tire pressure if it is still Battery (vehicle)
at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the driv- Important safety notes
er's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in
the fuel filler flap for values. Special tools and expert knowledge are required
X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work
tire inflation compressor.
involving the battery carried out at a qualified
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
Z
292 Battery (vehicle)
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. connected battery does not come into con-
You could lose control of the vehicle, for tact with vehicle parts.
example: RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
Rwhen
tery.
braking
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
bed order of the battery terminals when
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
adapted to the road conditions
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- connected.
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
RIt is particularly important to observe the
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
described order when connecting and dis-
should have all work involving the battery car-
connecting the jumper cables.
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
For further information about ABS and ESP®, terminals while the engine is running.
see (Y page 60) and (Y page 63).
G WARNING G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
explosion. the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
body to remove any existing electrostatic
tion.
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when H Environmental note

charging the battery as well as when jump-start- Batteries contain dangerous
ing. substances. It is against the
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat- law to dispose of them with
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of the household rubbish. They
electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple: must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
environment.
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Dispose of batteries in an
Rif you push or pull the battery across the car-
environmentally friendly
pet or other synthetic materials manner. Take discharged
Rif you rub the battery with a cloth batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
G WARNING collection point for used bat-
During the charging process, a battery produ- teries.
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle) 293
Observe the service intervals in the Mainte- Keep children away.

nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the bat- Observe this Operator's Manual.
tery carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop. In the exceptional case that it is neces-
sary for you to disconnect the battery your-
self, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
that the ignition is switched off. Check that
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
all the indicator lamps in the instrument
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic com-
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
ponents, such as the alternator, may be
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
damaged.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be suffi-
clamp and then the positive terminal
ciently charged.
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
may be damaged. discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
the transmission is locked in position P
charge the battery with a charger recommended
after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-
is secured against rolling away. You can ist workshop for further information.
then no longer move the vehicle.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
The battery and the cover of the positive ter- more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
minal clamp must be installed securely during short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
operation. lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
tective measures when handling batteries. parked for a long period of time.
Risk of explosion. Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
Fire, open flames and smoking are The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
prohibited when handling the bat- conserving battery power.
tery. Avoid creating sparks. If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if
you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
with skin, eyes or clothing. Rset the clock using the multimedia system;
Wear suitable protective clothing, see the separate operating instructions

especially gloves, apron and face- Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-
guard. rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir-
Rinse any acid spills immediately rors out once (Y page 101)
with clear water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Wear eye protection. Charging the battery
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Z
294 Jump-starting
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating The jump-starting connection point is in the
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient engine compartment (Y page 294).
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. X Open the hood.
Do not lean over a battery. X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
G WARNING jump-starting procedure (Y page 294).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over very likely that the discharged battery has fro-
the battery. Keep children away from batter- zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of
a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The start-
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
ing characteristics can be impaired, particularly
tion. at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out bat-
tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING Only charge the installed battery with a battery
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- charger which has been tested and approved by
tures below freezing point. When jump-start- Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an accessory. It permits the charging of the bat-

an explosion. tery in its installed position. Contact an author-
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before ized Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
charging it or jump-starting. tion and availability. Read the battery charger's
operating instructions before charging the bat-
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum tery.
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a pos-
itive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
Jump-starting 295
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very
likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. Let the battery thaw first. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter.
The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
ROnly use jumper cables that are not damaged and have a sufficient cross-section and insulated
terminal clamps.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
RThe jumper cables are not damaged.
RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts while
the jumper cables are connected to the battery.
RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the ignition lock and remove it.
Z
296 Jump-starting
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive terminal ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle
first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Close the hood.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
Towing and tow-starting 297
Towing and tow-starting To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate

these systems in the following or similar sit-
Important safety notes uations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
G WARNING Rin the car wash
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if: ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is
released. If the electric parking brake is faulty,
Rthe engine is not running. visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
malfunctioning. towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply damaged.
or the vehicle's electrical system. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-
If your vehicle is being towed, much more poses as this could damage the vehicle. If in
force may be necessary to steer or brake. doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
There is a risk of an accident. ! When towing, pull away slowly and
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
make sure that the steering moves freely. vehicles could be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
G WARNING 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the (50km/h) must not be exceeded.
steering wheel lock has been engaged. There If the vehicle has to be towed more than
is a risk of an accident. 30 miles (50km), the front axle must be raised
or the entire vehicle raised and transported.
Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
could damage the vehicle.
G WARNING ! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.
Otherwise, the automatic transmission may
and its weight is greater than the permissible shift to position P when the driver's or front-
gross weight of your vehicle, the: passenger door are opened, which could lead
Rthe towing eye could detach itself to damage to the transmission.
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must
over. not be started by tow-starting. This could oth-
erwise damage the transmission.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
its weight should not be greater than the per-
If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of
missible gross weight of your vehicle. an accident or breakdown, you have the follow-
ing options:
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- RTransporting the vehicle.
tification plate (Y page 329). As a rule, you should have the vehicle trans-
ported.
! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot
RTowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar.
DISTRONIC or the HOLD function is activated,
the vehicle brakes automatically in certain Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases.
situations.
Z
298 Towing and tow-starting
The battery must be connected and charged. The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool
Otherwise, you: kit under the cargo compartment floor
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in (Y page 286).
the ignition lock. Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is
Rcannot release the electric parking brake. beneath the tire inflation compressor
(Y page 287).
Rcannot shift the transmission to position i.
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
The function of the electric parking brake and direction of the arrow.
the parking lock is dependent on the on-board
X Take cover : off the opening.
voltage.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a sys-
tem malfunction:
Rthe electric parking brake may not be applied Removing the towing eye
in certain circumstances, or X Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
Rit may no longer be possible to shift the trans-
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
mission to position j it engages.
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the X Place the towing eye in the stowage well
radio. beneath the cargo compartment floor in the
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the cargo compartment (Y page 286).
vehicle is towed (Y page 200). You could other- X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the tire
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the inflation compressor (Y page 287).
vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye Towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised
Installing the towing eye Observe the important safety notes when tow-
ing your vehicle with the front axle raised
(Y page 297).
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed
with the front axle raised.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.
! The ignition must be switched off if the vehi-
cle is being towed with the front axle raised.
Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage
the brake system.
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO start function: you must use the
The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and (Y page 129).
at the front, under covers :. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Remove the towing eye from the stowage X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
space. tion lock.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
Towing and tow-starting 299
X Shift the automatic transmission to position Transporting the vehicle

j.
X Release the brake pedal. 4MATIC vehicles or vehicles with auto-
X Release the electric parking brake. matic transmission
X Switch off the automatic locking
(Y page 200).
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
front and rear axles must be stationary and on
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
(Y page 107). over the connection point of the transport
X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi- vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
tion g and leave the SmartKey in the ignition otherwise be damaged.
lock.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on

the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 297).
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO start function: you must use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 129).
The automatic transmission automatically shifts All vehicles
to position j when you open the driver's or
front-passenger door or when you remove the ! You may only secure the vehicle by the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
ensure that the automatic transmission stays in axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
position i when towing away the vehicle, you vehicle could be damaged.
must observe the following points: X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X Shift the transmission to position i.
tion lock. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
X Shift the automatic transmission to position applying the electric parking brake.
i. X Shift the transmission to position j.
X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni- X Turn the SmartKey to position g in the igni-
tion lock. tion lock and remove it.
X Release the brake pedal. X Secure the vehicle.
X Release the electric parking brake. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
(Y page 107). poses.
i In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
lamps for the direction of travel flash. After with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
resetting the combination switch, the hazard doing so will damage the transmission.
warning lamp starts flashing again.
Z
300 Fuses
Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be towed ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is
away with both axles on the ground or be loaded lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
up and transported. ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is ation of the fuses.
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
truck or trailer. faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
In the event of damage to the electrical sys- nents on the circuit and their functions stop
tem: operating.
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans- Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
mission will be locked in position j. To shift the same rating, which you can recognize by the
automatic transmission to position i, you color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
must provide power to the vehicle's on-board fuse allocation chart.
electrical system in the same way as when jump- The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the
starting (Y page 294). front-passenger footwell (Y page 301).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
trailer. cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
Before changing a fuse
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must

not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam- X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
age the automatic transmission. (Y page 147).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
i You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (Y page 294). X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Fuses or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics are now in position
Important safety notes g. This is the same as the SmartKey being
removed from the ignition.
G WARNING The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
age, the electric cables could be overloaded. the direction of travel
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
accident and injury. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified front-passenger footwell (Y page 301).
new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved for Fuse box in the engine compartment
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned. G WARNING
Only use fuses marked with an "S". Other- When the hood is open and the windshield
wise, components or systems could be dam- wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
aged.
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the Always switch off the windshield wipers and
fuse box when the cover is open. the ignition before opening the hood.
Fuses 301
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-

well
X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X To open: open clamps ;. X To open: open the front-passenger door.
X Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow X Remove the floormat.
and remove it. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
direction of the arrow.
X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-
rectly in cover :. X To release cover =, press retaining
X Insert cover : at the back into openings =
clamp ;.
on the fuse box. X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow
X Fold down cover :.
to the catch.
X Remove cover = forwards.
Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the
lower right-hand side of cover =.
X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side
of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audi-
bly.
X Fold back perforated floor covering :.
X Install the floormats.
X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close.

X Close the hood.
Z
302 Operation
Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires

can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 326).
G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center.
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tire pressure can be found:
dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side
that fulfill the specifications of the original (Y page 313)
part. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(Y page 145)
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 305)
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel Operation
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Information on driving
correct:
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
Rdesignation heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
Rmanufacturer While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
Rmodel and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
G WARNING a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
Wheels and tires
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
There is a risk of accident. tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. qualified specialist workshop.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
consult a qualified specialist workshop. obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
Tires with run-flat characteristics: angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Rpay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics). Regular checking of wheels and tires
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
Before purchasing and using non-approved sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
shop and inquire about: Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
Rsuitability and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Operation 303
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once Minimum tire tread depth for:
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
attention to damage such as:
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
RCuts in the tires
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
RPunctures in the tires tire tread depth is reached.
RTears in the tires
RBulges on tires
RDeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (Y page 303). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marking : shows where bar indicator ; for
monitoring systems. tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
sure as necessary (Y page 305). They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
Observe the notes on the emergency spare imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
wheel (Y page 326). is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
Wheels and tires

replaced.
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
Selecting, mounting and replacing
RTire pressure
tires
RDistance covered
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
Notes on tire tread city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
G WARNING
is a risk of accident.
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
tire load rating and speed rating required for
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
your vehicle.
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident. ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires and make.
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
should regularly check the tread depth and Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Z
304 Winter operation
with run-flat characteristics)" section Driving with summer tires

(Y page 288).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
wheels. tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only temperatures could cause cracks to form,
reach their full performance after this dis- thereby damaging the tires permanently.
tance. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
RDo not drive with tires which have too little this type of damage.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). G WARNING
RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
regardless of wear. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
Observe the notes on the emergency spare your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
wheel (Y page 326).
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
M+S tires
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- G WARNING
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires. M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an activated tire pressure loss warning and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
system (Canada only) or tire pressure monitor a risk of an accident.
Wheels and tires
(USA only) and only on wheels specifically tes- M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
ted by Mercedes-Benz. (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (Y page 288). At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It identified by the M+S marking.
is therefore recommended that you additionally Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
a qualified specialist workshop. such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in
winter. These tires have been developed specif-
ically for driving in snow.
Winter operation Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
General notes tics.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified Always observe the maximum permissible
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. speed specified for the M+S tires you have
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" mounted.
section (Y page 322).
Tire pressure 305
When you have mounted the M+S tires: You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 305). away with snow chains installed . You can
thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (USA only)
manner, achieving an increased driving force
(Y page 312). (cutting action).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada) (Y page 309) RDeactivate ESP® (all vehicles except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (Y page 64)
RDeactivate ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(Y page 65)
Snow chains
Information about driving with an emergency
G WARNING spare wheel (Y page 326).
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
Tire pressure
to the vehicle body or to chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the Tire pressure specifications
tires. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations: Important safety notes
Rnever mount snow chains on the rear G WARNING
wheels Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the following risks:
front wheels. Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough space
for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi- Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com- unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
Wheels and tires

binations" section under "Tires and wheels". traction.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
mends that you only use snow chains that have ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding There is a risk of an accident.
standard of quality. For more information, Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
please contact a qualified specialist workshop. and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear ing the spare wheel:
the following points in mind:
Rmonthly, at least
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
Rif the load changes
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-
tire combinations (Y page 326). Rbefore beginning a long journey
ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
completely covered by snow. Remove the off-road driving
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered. If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if i The data on the Tire and Loading Informa-
you wish to mount snow chains. tion placard and tire pressure table shown
here are examples. Tire pressure specifica-
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
tions are vehicle-specific and may deviate
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). from the data shown here. The tire pressure
RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are specifications that are valid for your vehicle
installed (Y page 177). can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-
Z
306 Tire pressure
mation placard and tire pressure table on the

vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with an emergency spare wheel:
information on operation with an emergency
spare wheel can be found in the general notes in
the "Emergency spare wheel" section
(Y page 326). The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
Further information on tire pressures can be ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Tire and Loading Information placard If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for
that tire size; see illustration (example).
Wheels and tires
: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 313). The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num-
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold actual number of seats may differ.
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
illustration (example).
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim

diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 317).
Tire pressure 307
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower The tire temperature and pressure increase
values for lighter loads and/or lower road when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the on the driving speed and the load.
higher values: Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
Rif you want to drive with an increased load sures when the tires are cold.
and/or The tires are cold:
Rif you want to drive at higher speeds Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires
i The tire pressures for increased loads and/ out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pres- and
sure table, may have a negative effect on driv- Rif the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile
ing comfort. (1.6 km)
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can The tire temperature changes depending on the
lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud- outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the
den loss of pressure. tire load. If the tire temperature changes by
18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
For more information, contact a qualified spe- approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
cialist workshop. this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
too low for the current operating conditions. If
Important notes on tire pressure you check the tire pressure when the tires are
warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
G WARNING the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
be too low.
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. cold tires:
Wheels and tires

RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the on the B-pillar on the driver's side
valve is leaking. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- (Y page 145)
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires

If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire Underinflated tires
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure G WARNING
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres- Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
risk of an accident. ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
Only screw the standard valve cap or other ing properties and the driving characteristics.
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for There is a risk of an accident.
your vehicle onto the tire valve. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does Underinflated tires may:
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- Roverheat, leading to tire defects
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure Radversely affect handling
can be checked in the on-board computer.
Z
308 Tire pressure
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Checking the tire pressures

Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires Observe the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 305).
G WARNING
Information on air pressure for the tires on your
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst vehicle can be found:
because they are damaged more easily by Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they placard on the B-pillar
also suffer from irregular wear, which can Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
severely impair the braking properties and the (Y page 145)
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an Rin the "Tire pressure" section
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the Checking tire pressures manually
tires, including the spare wheel.
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
Overinflated tires may: proceed as follows:
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
Rincrease the braking distance
checked.
Radversely affect handling
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
the valve.
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
Rbe more susceptible to damage recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
Maximum tire pressures (Y page 305).
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
Wheels and tires
pressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- (Canada only)
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire General notes
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 305).
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- This enables the system to detect significant
cific and may deviate from the values in the pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
illustration. a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
a corresponding warning message will appear in
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
Tire pressure 309
'OK' to Restart message in the multifunction tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
display in the Serv. menu. Information on the set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
message display can be found in the "Restarting X Also observe the notes in the section on tire
the tire pressure loss warning" section pressures (Y page 305).
(Y page 309). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (Y page 128).
Important safety notes X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
The tire pressure warning system does not warn select the Serv. menu.
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe X Press the 9 or : button to select
the notes on the recommended tire pressure Tire Pressure.
Pressure
(Y page 305). X Press the a button.
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An 'OK' to Restart message appears in the
even loss of pressure on several tires at the multifunction display.
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- If you wish to confirm the restart:
sure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you X Press the a button.
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a appears in the multifunction display.
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering X Press the a button.
movements. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
The function of the tire pressure loss warning sage appears in the multifunction display.
system is limited or delayed if: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
tires. sures of all four tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry. If you wish to cancel the restart:
Wheels and tires

Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. X Press the % button.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner- or
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
acceleration). appears, press the 9 or : button to
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi- select Cancel.
Cancel
cle or on the roof) X Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- restart will continue to be monitored.
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have: Tire pressure monitor (Canada only)
Rchanged the tire pressure General notes
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
pressures are set properly on all four tires for itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
the respective operating conditions. more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
The recommended tire pressure can be found functions if the corresponding sensors are
on the Tire and Loading Information placard installed in all wheels.
on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire multifunction display. After a few minutes of
pressure loss warning system can only give driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
reliable warnings if you have set the correct
Z
310 Tire pressure
shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
display, see illustration (example). sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
For information on the message display, refer to remain continuously illuminated. This
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
section (Y page 311).
cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
G WARNING or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
should be checked at least once every two reasons, including the installation of incom-
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure patible replacement or alternate tires or
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
on the Tire and Loading Information placard from functioning properly. Always check the
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
your vehicle has tires of a different size than ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
Wheels and tires
Information placard or, if available, the tire function properly.

pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has which is suitable for the operating situation
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (Y page 305). Note that the correct tire pressure
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- for the current operating situation must first be
sure telltale when one or more of your tires taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning
threshold for the warning message is aligned to
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire
you should stop and check your tires as soon pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of
as possible, and inflate them to the proper the cold tires (Y page 312). The current pres-
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- sures are saved as new reference values. As a
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can result, a warning message will appear if the tire
lead to tire failure. pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's notes on the recommended tire pressure
handling and stopping ability. Please note that (Y page 305).
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
underinflation has not reached the level to sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
Tire pressure 311
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning If the vehicle was parked for longer than
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the displayed after driving a few minutes
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates message is shown.
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
pressure monitor is malfunctioning: itor automatically detects new wheels or new
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
pressure on one or more tires is significantly pressure value to the individual wheels is not
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active
functioning. message is shown instead of the tire pressure
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a display. The tire pressures are already being
minute and then remains lit constantly, the monitored.
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
In addition to the warning lamp, a message system may continue to show the tire pressure
appears in the multifunction display. Observe of the wheel that has been removed for a few
the information on display messages minutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-
(Y page 224). played for the position where the spare wheel is
mounted is not the same as the current tire
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
one minute and then remaining lit. When the sages
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
driving. loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure
Wheels and tires

tire pressures shown by the on-board computer message appears in the multifunction display,
refer to those measured at sea level. At high the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low.
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a The tire pressure must be corrected when the
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by opportunity arises.
the on-board computer. In this case, do not RIf the Check Tire Pressure message
reduce the tire pressures. appears in the multifunction display, the tire
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can pressure in one or more tires has dropped
be affected by interference from radio transmit- significantly. The tires must be checked.
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Fail‐
radios) that may be being operated in or near the ure message appears, the tire pressure in one
vehicle. or more tires has dropped suddenly. The tires
must be checked.
Checking the tire pressure electroni- Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
cally display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page 224).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
in the ignition lock (Y page 128). the tire pressures may be displayed for the
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
select the Serv. menu. after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
X Press the 9 or : button to select sures are displayed for the correct positions.
Pressure.
Tire Pressure
X Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
Z
312 Tire pressure
Restarting the tire pressure monitor Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur- Country Radio type approval number
rently set tire pressures as the reference values USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 This device
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
complies with part 15 of the FCC
ence values after you have changed the tire
rules and with license exempt
pressure. However, you can also set reference
RSS standards of Industry Can-
values manually as described here. The tire
ada. Operation is subject to the
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire
following conditions. (1) This
pressure values.
device may not cause harmful
X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen- interference, and (2) This device
ded for the corresponding driving situation on must accept any interference
the Tire and Loading Information placard on received, including interference
the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 305). that may cause undesired oper-
You can find more tire pressure values for ation. Le present appareil est
various operating conditions in the tire pres- conforme d'industrie Canada
sure table inside the fuel filler flap applicables aux appereils radio
(Y page 145). exempts de licence. L'exploita-
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on tion est authorisee aux deux con-
all four wheels. ditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
ne doit pas produire de brouil-
in the ignition lock (Y page 128). lage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'ap-
pareil doit accepter tout brouil-
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
lage radioelectrique subi, meme
select the Serv. menu. si le brouillage est susceptible
X Press the 9 or : button to select d'en compromettre le fonc-
Wheels and tires
Pressure
Tire Pressure. tionnement. WARNING: Changes
X Press the a button. or modifications not expressively
The multifunction display shows the current approved by the party responsi-
tire pressure for each tire or the Tire pres‐ ble for compliance could void the
sure will be displayed after driving users authority to operate the
a few minutes message. equipment. The term "IC:" before
X Press the : button. the radio certification number
The multifunction display shows the Use only signifies Canada technical
Current Pressures as New Reference specifications were met.
Values message. FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This
device complies with part 15 of
If you wish to confirm the restart: the FCC rules and with license
X Press the a button. exempt RSS standards of Indus-
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted mes- try Canada. Operation is subject
sage appears in the multifunction display. to the following conditions. (1)
After driving for a few minutes, the system This device may not cause harm-
checks whether the current tire pressures are ful interference, and (2) This
within the specified range. The new tire pres- device must accept any interfer-
sures are then accepted as reference values ence received, including interfer-
and monitored. ence that may cause undesired
operation. Le present appareil
If you wish to cancel the restart: est conforme d'industrie Canada
X Press the % button. applicables aux appereils radio
The tire pressure values stored at the last exempts de license. L'exploita-
restart will continue to be monitored. tion est authorisee aux deux con-
ditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil
Loading the vehicle 313
Country Radio type approval number Loading the vehicle

ne doit pas produire de brouil- Instruction labels for tires and loads
lage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'ap-
pareil doit accepter tout brouil- G WARNING
lage radioelectrique subi, meme
si le brouillage est susceptible Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
d'en compromettre le fonc- blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
tionnement. WARNING: Changes steering and driving characteristics and lead
or modifications not expressively to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
users authority to operate the rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
equipment. The term "IC:" before your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
the radio certification number exceeding the maximum load.
only signifies Canada technical
specifications were met. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC:2546A-GG4 This device com- (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
plies with part 15 of the FCC on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
rules and with license exempt and Loading Information placard shows the
RSS standards of Industry Can- maximum permissible number of occu-
ada. Operation is subject to the pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
following conditions. (1) This load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
device may not cause harmful and corresponding pressures for tires
interference, and (2) This device mounted at the factory.
must accept any interference (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
received, including interference pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
Wheels and tires

that may cause undesired oper- tification plate informs you of the gross
ation. Le present appareil est vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
conforme d'industrie Canada vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
applicables aux appereils radio fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
exempts de license. L'exploita- mation about the maximum gross axle
tion est authorisee aux deux con- weight rating on the front and rear axle.
ditions suivantes. (1). L'appareil The maximum gross axle weight rating is
ne doit pas produire de brouil- the maximum weight that can be carried by
lage, et (2) L'autisatuer de l'ap- one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
pareil doit accepter tout brouil- the maximum load or the maximum gross
lage radioelectrique subi, meme axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonc-
tionnement. WARNING: Changes
or modifications not expressively
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the
users authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC:" before
the radio certification number
only signifies Canada technical
specifications were met.
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
: B-pillar, driver's side
Z
314 Loading the vehicle
Maximum permissible gross vehicle Maximum number of seats : indicates the

weight rating maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Step-by-step instructions
Information placard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed The following steps have been developed as
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
and luggage must not exceed the specified
Safety Act of 1966".
value.
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
i The specifications shown on the Tire and weight of occupants and cargo should never
Loading Information placard in the illustration exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
are examples. The maximum permissible Tire and Loading Information placard.
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
Wheels and tires
and may differ from that in the illustration.

the driver and passengers that will be riding in
You can find the valid maximum permissible
your vehicle.
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
the Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
Number of seats
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
culated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
Loading the vehicle 315
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 313).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs
pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(82 kg) (86 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs
Wheels and tires

(73 kg) (68 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Step 3
Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
fully, you should still make sure that the gross the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 313).
Z
316 All about wheels and tires
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Example:

(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas- RTreadwear grade: 200
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
RTraction grade: AA
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight. RTemperature grade: A
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi- All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by utory safety requirements in addition to these
one axle (front or rear axle). grades.
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle cific and may deviate from the values in the
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), illustration.
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
All about wheels and tires under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
ards on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- the actual conditions of their use, however, and
ards may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
Traction
Wheels and tires
G WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
government specifications. Their purpose is to ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information the drive train.
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac- The traction grades – from highest to lowest –
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
= temperature grade. These regulations do not tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in ured under controlled conditions on specified
North America are provided with the corre- government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
sponding quality grading markings on the side- crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
wall of the tire. performance.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
maximum section width. You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
All about wheels and tires 317
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread Tire labeling

depth (Y page 303). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in Overview
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
priate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(Y page 304).
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
(Y page 321)
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions ; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- cation Number (Y page 320)
tained high temperature can cause the material = Maximum load rating (Y page 319)
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 308)
Wheels and tires

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire A Manufacturer
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of B Tire material (Y page 320)
performance which all passenger car tires must C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety and speed rating (Y page 317)
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory D Load index (Y page 319)
test wheel than the minimum required by law. E Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating
G WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Z
tire load rating and speed rating required for description, depending on the manufacturer
your vehicle. (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 313).
Example:
: Tire width Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
; Nominal aspect ratio in % load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
= Tire code For further information on the maximum tire
? Rim diameter load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 319).
A Load bearing index For further information on the load bearing
B Speed rating index, see "Load index" (Y page 319).
General: depending on the manufacturer's Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may approved maximum speed of the tire.
not contain any letters or may contain one letter i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
that precedes the size description. from the data in the example.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
Wheels and tires
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your

vehicle tires according to European manufac- driving style to the traffic conditions.
turing standards.
Summer tires
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man- Index Speed rating
ufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an emer- T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
gency. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters. V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
by dividing the tire width by the tire height. ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag- ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over
149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man- Make sure that your tires have the required
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
The service specification is made up of load- required speed rating for your vehicle can be
bearing index A and speed rating B. found in the "Tires" section (Y page 326).
RIf the size description of your tire includes Further information about reading tire data can
"ZR" and there are no service specifications, be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out shop.
the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the max- Load index
imum speed is limited according to the speed
rating in the service specification. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR" and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man- In addition to the load-bearing index, load
ufacturer about the maximum speed. index : may be imprinted after the letters that
All-weather tires and winter tires identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire.
Speed rating (Y page 317).
Index Speed rating RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
Wheels and tires

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) (SL) tire
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In from the data in the example.
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire Maximum load rating
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
1 Or M+S i for winter tires.
Z
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis- Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
sible weight for which the tire is approved. provides information about the age of a tire. The
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the first and second positions represent the week of
specified load limit. The maximum permissible manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and endar week. Positions three and four represent
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
the driver's side (Y page 313). is marked with "3208", was manufactured in
week 32 in 2008.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
illustration. from the data in the example.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire characteristics

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
This information describes the type of tire cord

and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
Wheels and tires
The TIN is a unique identification number. The i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders from the data in the example.
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the Definition of terms for tires and loading
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica- Tire ply composition and material used
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
Describes the number of plies or the number of
manufacturing date A.
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the polyester and other materials.
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation. Bar
Manufacturer identification code: manufac- Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
turer identification code ; provides details on per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code are the equivalent of 1 bar.
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols. DOT (Department of Transportation)
For further information about retreaded tires, DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
see (Y page 326). U S Department of Transportation.
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Normal occupant weight
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific The number of occupants for which the vehicle
characteristics of the tire. is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
temperature characteristics. The quality grad- vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
following specifications from the U.S. govern- applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the tire. the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Recommended tire pressures Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The recommended tire pressure applies to the The maximum weight is the sum of:
tires mounted at the factory. Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard con- Rthe weight of the accessories
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
Rthe load limit
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed. Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
The tire pressure table contains the recommen- equipment
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- Kilopascal (kPa)
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions. Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
Increased vehicle weight due to optional bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
equipment 1 bar.
The combined weight of all standard and Load index
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
the vehicle or not. index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
Wheels and tires

Rim more precisely.
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is Curb weight
mounted.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
tem and optional equipment if these are instal-
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
gers or luggage.
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's Maximum load rating
side.
The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
Speed rating sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved.
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is Maximum permissible tire pressure
approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Maximum load on one tire
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross two.
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Z
322 Changing a wheel
PSI (pounds per square inch) Load bearing index

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
Aspect ratio city of a tire.
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent. Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
Tire pressure and the road surface.
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur- Treadwear indicators
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
The tire pressure should only be corrected when with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
the tires are cold. has been reached.
Cold tire pressure Occupant distribution
The tires are cold: The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their
Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires designated seating positions.
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours Total load limit
and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
1 mile (1.6 km)
the vehicle.
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road. Changing a wheel
Bead Flat tire
Wheels and tires
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely The "Breakdown assistance" section
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the (Y page 287) contains information and notes on
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
the wheel rim. ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
Sidewall with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 288).
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels
The combined weight of those optional extras G WARNING
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
optional extras, such as high-performance severely impair the driving characteristics if
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per- the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
formance battery, are not included in the curb The wheel brakes or suspension components
weight and the weight of the accessories. may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
TIN (Tire Identification Number) dent.
This is a unique identifier which can be used by Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example and tires are of the same dimensions.
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and monitor, electronic components are located
the manufacturing date. in the wheel.
Changing a wheel 323
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near Mounting a wheel

the valve. This could damage the electronic
components. Preparing the vehicle
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the X Apply the electric parking brake manually.
"Changing a wheel" section (Y page 322).
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires position.
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position j.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically X Switch off the engine.
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
the center. SmartKey from the ignition lock.
On vehicles that have the same size front and X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord- or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's The vehicle electronics are now in position
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no u. This is the same as “key removed”.
warranty book is available, the tires should be X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may ton from the ignition lock (Y page 128).
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
X Make sure that the engine cannot be started
of wheel rotation.
via your smartphone (Y page 87).
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
restart the tire pressure loss warning system X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away
(Canada only) or the tire pressure monitor (USA (Y page 147).
only).
Wheels and tires

i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a
tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a
Direction of rotation wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have information on which tools are required to
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- perform a wheel change on your vehicle, con-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if sult a qualified specialist workshop.
the tires are installed corresponding to the Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
direction of rotation. example:
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its RJack
correct direction of rotation. RWheel chock
RLug wrench
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Z
324 Changing a wheel
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from must be positioned vertically, directly under
rolling away the jacking point of the vehicle.
! Only position the jack at the appropriate

jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damage the vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it changed. It must not be used for performing
can be found in the tire-change tool kit maintenance work under the vehicle.
(Y page 286). RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety hill slopes.
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
away, for example when changing a wheel. ing away by applying the parking brake and
X Fold both plates up :. inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
X Fold out lower plate ;. parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
openings in base plate =. non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
Wheels and tires
RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects

as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
RMake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
RNever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
RDo not lie under the vehicle.
X Place chocks or other suitable items under
RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. raised.
RNever open or close a door or the tailgate
when the vehicle is raised.
Raising the vehicle RMake sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
G WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
Changing a wheel 325
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
wheel you wish to change by about one full beneath the jacking point.
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
Wheels and tires

Jacking points
X Remove the wheel.
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
wheel housings (arrows). Mounting a new wheel
G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
X Take ratchet wrench ? out of the vehicle tool replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack =
so that the letters AUF are visible. G WARNING
X Position jack = at jacking point ;. If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Z
326 Wheel and tire combinations
Always pay attention to the instructions and

safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(Y page 322).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
in the vehicle again.
X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles
with AMG Line: use the cover of the outer sill.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- (Y page 305).
faces. Canada only: as long as you are driving with the
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pres-
Wheels and tires
push it on. sure loss warning system cannot function relia-

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- bly. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning
tight. system when the defective wheel has been
replaced with a new wheel.
Lowering the vehicle Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA
only): all mounted wheels must be equipped
G WARNING with functioning sensors.
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
Wheel and tire combinations
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately General notes
checked at a qualified specialist workshop You can ask for information regarding permitted
after a wheel is changed. wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon You should regularly check the pressure of the
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi- emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
ble. long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is sary (Y page 305). The value on the wheel is
once again standing firmly on the ground. valid.
X Place the jack to one side.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
Wheel and tire combinations 327
These tires have been specially adapted for Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip
use with the control systems, such as ABS or the vehicle:
ESP®, and are marked as follows: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original and right)
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended Rwith the same type of tire (summer tires,
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics) MOExtended tires, winter tires)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
tain AMG tires) ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
only be used on wheels that have been spe- run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 288).
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain is therefore recommended that you additionally
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
emissions or fuel consumption, may other- tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
driving with a load, tire dimension variations a qualified specialist workshop.
could cause the tires to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any quali-
Wheels and tires

fied specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(Y page 305).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Z
328 Vehicle electronics
Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be

complied with:
i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Robserve the maximum permissible output
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the in these wavebands.
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
Installing two-way radios and mobile account current scientific discussions relating
phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result
from electromagnetic fields.
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
G WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incor- Approved antenna positions
rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere : Front roof area
with the vehicle electronics, for example: ; Rear roof area
= Rear fender
Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with
an exterior antenna i On vehicles with panorama roof with power
Technical data
Rthe exterior antenna has been installed

tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the
front or rear roof area is not permitted.
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
This can compromise the operational safety position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. closest to the center of the road.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- radio frequency transmitting equipment).
Observe the legal requirements for accessory
tion exterior antenna. parts.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
! The operating permit may be invalidated if equipment, use the power supply or antenna
the instructions for installation and use of RF
connections intended for use with the basic wir-
transmitters are not observed.
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-
plement when installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Identification plates 329
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates

base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values: Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Frequency band Maximum
cle identification number (VIN)
transmission
output
Short wave 100 W
3 - 54 MHz
4 m waveband 30 W
74 - 88 MHz
2 m waveband 50 W
144 - 174 MHz
Trunked radio system/ 10 W
Tetra X Open the driver's door.
380 - 460 MHz You will see vehicle identification plate :.
70 cm waveband 35 W
400 - 460 MHz
Mobile communications 10 W
(2G/3G/4G)
The following can be used in the vehicle without

restrictions:
RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
Technical data
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio system/Tetra) : VIN
RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) ; Paint code
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
RTrunked radio system/Tetra
R70 cm waveband
R2G/3G/4G
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

: VIN
; Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
Z
330 Service products and filling capacities
different for every vehicle and can deviate Service products and filling capaci-
from the data shown here. You can find the ties
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Vehicle identification number (VIN) Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
Dispose of service products in an environ-
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost mentally responsible manner.
position.
Service products include the following:
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;. RFuels
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-
RCoolant
tification plate (Y page 329).
RBrake fluid
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of
the windshield (Y page 330). RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must match.
Engine number Only use products recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of
Technical data
products which have not been recommended is

not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or
goodwill gestures. Products approved by
Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's
Manual in the appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
: Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Cali- RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
fornian emissions standards RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) Other designations or recommendations indi-
= Engine number (stamped into the crank- cate a level of quality or a specification in
case) accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Service products and filling capacities 331
Other identifications, for example: Tank capacity

R0 W-30
R5 W-30
Model Total capa-
city
R5 W-40
Models with 4MATIC 14.8 US gal
(56.0 l)
Fuel All other models 13.2 US gal
(50.0 l)
G WARNING Model Of which
reserve
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx.
sion. 2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine All other models Approx.
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before 1.6 US gal
refueling. (6.0 l)
G WARNING Gasoline
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
Fuel grade
You must make sure that fuel does not come
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
If you or others come into contact with fuel, result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
observe the following:
Technical data
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
RWash away fuel from skin immediately completely.
using soap and water. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
out delay. refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-
ing. age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
RImmediately change out of clothing which system.
has come into contact with fuel. ! Do not use the following:
RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol
RE100 (100% ethanol)
RGasoline with methanol
RM100 (100% methanol)
RGasoline with metalliferous additives
RDiesel
Z
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- The fuel quality available in some countries may
mended for your vehicle. not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In such cases,
! To ensure the longevity and full perform- and in consultation with an authorized
ance of the engine, only premium-grade Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
unleaded gasoline must be used. with the cleaning additive recommended by
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline and mixing ratios specified on the container.
of a lower grade, observe the following pre-
cautions:
ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular Engine oil
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as General notes
possible.
RDo not drive at the maximum speed.
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the fuel pump. If you cannot find the
label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff.
i For further information, consult a qualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
GLA 250, GLA 250 4MATIC: as a temporary
measure, if the recommended fuel is not avail-
able, you may also use regular unleaded gaso- ! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with
line with an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON. specifications deviating from those expressly
required for the prescribed service intervals.
All other models: as a temporary measure, if Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in
the recommended fuel is not available, you may order to set replacement intervals longer than
also use regular unleaded gasoline with an those prescribed. This could otherwise cause
octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may
Technical data
damage to the engine or exhaust gas after-

reduce engine performance and increase fuel treatment.
consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and
sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gaso- Follow the instructions on the service interval
line with a lower AKI. display for changing the engine oil. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engine or
Information on refueling (Y page 145). exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Additives When handling engine oil, observe the important
! Operating the engine with fuel additives safety notes on service products (Y page 330).
added later can lead to engine failure. Do not The engine oils are matched to the performance
mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
include additives for the removal and preven- You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
mixed with additives recommended by tenance systems.
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
for use on the product label. More information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
about recommended additives can be Or visit the website
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Center. The table shows which engine oils have been
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran- approved for your vehicle.
ded fuels that have additives.
Service products and filling capacities 333
Model MB-Freigabe or i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a

MB-Approval qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
All models 229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils Coolant

for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers. G WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
Filling capacities ponents in the engine compartment, it may
The following values refer to an engine oil ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
change, including the oil filter. Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
Model Capacity freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) antifreeze from components before starting
All other models 5.9 US qt (5.6 l) the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed

Additives with the desired antifreeze protection. You
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. could otherwise damage the engine.
This could damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Brake fluid Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture in countries where high temperatures prevail.
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
Technical data
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
There is a risk of an accident. ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at Comply with the important safety precautions
the specified intervals. for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 330).
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor- The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion
tant safety notes on service products inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It performs
(Y page 330). the following tasks:
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in RAnti-corrosion protection
the Maintenance Booklet. RAntifreeze protection
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- RRaising the boiling point
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB- If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
Approval 331.0. -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
Information about approved brake fluid can be during operation is approximately 266 ‡
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or (130 †).
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Z
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
concentration in the engine cooling system tant safety notes on service products
should: (Y page 330).
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine At temperatures above freezing:
cooling system against freezing down to X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †) water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down SummerFit.
to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
dissipated as effectively
Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or cor- At temperatures below freezing:
rosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
accordance with water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
i The coolant is checked with every mainte- year round.
nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Climate control system refrigerant
Filling capacities
Model Capacity The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
Mercedes‑AMG Approx. 12.6 US qt led with refrigerant R‑134a.
vehicles (11.9 l) The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the left, on the under-
All other models Approx. 8.2 US qt side of the hood.
(7.8 l)
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Technical data
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with

Windshield washer system any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
Important safety notes control system may be damaged.
G WARNING Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or
replacing component parts, may only be carried
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-
it comes into contact with hot engine compo- cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639,
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of must be adhered to.
fire and injury. Always have work on the climate control system
Make sure that no windshield washer con- carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit

washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
Vehicle data 335
Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data

General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
RThe heights specified may vary as a result of:
- Tires
- Load
- Condition of the suspension
- Optional equipment
ROptional equipment reduces the maximum
payload
Example: refrigerant instruction label

: Warning symbol Dimensions and weights
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
RPossible dangers
RHaving service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Mercedes‑AMG Capacity
vehicles Model : ;
Maximum Height
Refrigerant 23.6 ± 0.4 oz headroom when
Technical data
(670 ± 10 g) opened
PAG oil 4.2 oz Mercedes- 73.5 in 79.5 in
(120 g) AMG vehicles (1866 mm) (2019 mm)
All other mod- 75.4 in 82.0 in
All other models Capacity els (1914 mm) (2083 mm)
Refrigerant 22.9 ± 0.4 oz
(650 ± 10 g) Mercedes‑AMG
vehicles
PAG oil 4.2 oz
(120 g) Vehicle length 175.3 in
(4455 mm)
Vehicle width 79.6 in
including exterior (2022 mm)
mirrors
Vehicle height 58.2 in
(1479 mm)
Z
336 Vehicle data for off-road driving
Mercedes‑AMG Vehicle data for off-road driving

vehicles
Approach/departure angle
Wheelbase 106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Minimum ground 6.1 in
clearance (155 mm)
Turning radius 38.7 ft
(11.8 m)
Maximum roof load 165.3 lb
(75 kg)
Maximum trunk 220.5 lb
load (100 kg)
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
All other models
: ;
Vehicle length 174.1 in Approach
(4424 mm) and depar-
Vehicle width 79.6 in ture angles
including exterior when the
(2022 mm) vehicle is loa-
mirrors
ded and
Vehicle height 60.3 in ready to drive
(1532 mm)
When the vehicle is loaded and ready to drive, it
Minimum ground 8.0 in has a full tank, all fluids have been refilled and
clearance (204 mm) the driver is in the vehicle.
For further information about approach/depar-
Technical data
Wheelbase 106.3 in
(2699 mm) ture angles, see (Y page 157).
Turning radius 38.7 ft

(11.8 m) Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-
Maximum roof load
ity
165.3 lb
(75 kg) Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
bility depends on the off-road conditions and the
Maximum trunk 220.5 lb road surface conditions.
load (100 kg) GLA 250: the maximum gradient climbing abil-
ity is 40%.
GLA 250 4MATIC: the maximum gradient
climbing ability is 65%.
Missing values for the
Mercedes‑AMG GLA 45 4MATIC were not avail-
able at the time of going to print.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
wheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-
rain.
Vehicle data for off-road driving 337
If the load on the front axle is reduced when

pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front
wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recogni-
zes this and brakes the wheels accordingly. The
rear wheel torque is increased, making it easier
to drive off.
For further information about the maximum gra-
dient climbing ability, see (Y page 158).
Technical data
Z
338
339
340

Gla200 FL 2018 X156

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Gla200 FL 2018 X156

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GLA

Steering wheel ..................................... 100

Stowage areas ..................................... 251

Maintenance and care ...................... 273

Breakdown assistance ..................... 285

Wheels and tires ............................... 302

Technical data ................................... 328

1, 2, 3 ... Occupant Classification System

Resetting the service interval dis- Engaging park position automati-

Notes/function .............................. 185 C

Change of address .............................. 26 Setting the temperature ................ 122

Cover Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 204

Driver's seat Driving tips

Folding in when locking (on-board Fuel filler flap

Head restraints Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Model type Occupant safety

Factory settings ............................. 201 Parking

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Rear lamps

Rescue card ......................................... 28 Seat

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Important safety notes .................... 69

Steering Obstruction detection ...................... 78

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 196 Tires

Replacing ....................................... 322 With front axle raised ..................... 298

U Vehicle identification number

Interchanging/changing ................ 322

Introduction Operating the Digital Operator's Man-

cle. Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you

Operating safety loose floormats and do not place floormats on

components is available on the following web-

C Overhead control panel 38 K Opens the hood 273

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 i In vehicles with multimedia system

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section

i Mercedes-AMG vehicles Function Page

Door control panel

Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page

switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-

Introduction ing. Do not lean forward or lean against the

Front air bags

into the seats. Consequently, the air bags

Window curtain air bags : are integrated into

Requirements The indicator lamps inform you whether the

guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt

G WARNING After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR

lamp shows the status of the front-passenger

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning G WARNING

ded protective function. This poses an

G WARNING three-point seat belt can be properly fastened

Child restraint system G WARNING

You will find further information on stowing

If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked,

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint

Top Tether anchorages Make sure that:

Child restraint system on the front-

Forward-facing child restraint system G WARNING

Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle

Braking workshop. This also applies to collisions at low